1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4628 } \SpecialChar ldots
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator plain
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10514 ) and behind it the new list.
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Parent Environment
10520 only appears if the item is nested.
10521 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10527 (red arrow in LyX).
10528 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10529 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10536 arg "paragraph-break"
10543 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10546 \begin_layout Section
10547 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10562 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10564 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10565 be broken at the end of a line.
10566 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10570 \begin_layout Subsection
10572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10574 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10593 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10594 ) not to break the line at
10596 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10599 \begin_layout Quote
10600 Further documentation is given in section
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10607 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 A protected space is set with
10642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10659 \begin_layout Subsection
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10663 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10668 \begin_inset Index idx
10671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 Spacing ! Horizontal
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 The length units are listed in Appendix
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10695 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10706 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 Spaces ! Inter-word
10723 \begin_layout Standard
10724 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10725 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10726 at the ends of sentences.
10727 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10728 automatically takes care about this.
10729 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10730 followed by a period; see section
10731 \begin_inset space ~
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10737 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10742 To insert a normal space, select
10744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10755 arg "space-insert normal"
10761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10765 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10770 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10800 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10801 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10802 inside abbreviations:
10805 \begin_layout Quote
10807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10815 or between values and units.
10816 Compare for example this:
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 10 kg (normal space
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10845 arg "space-insert thin"
10851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can also insert the following space types:
10859 \begin_layout Description
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 space A line with a
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10873 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10880 negative thin space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative medium space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative thick space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10960 em) space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 cm space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11060 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11064 lists the different space sizes.
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 \begin_inset Float table
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11083 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset Tabular
11094 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11095 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11385 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11386 feature for adding extra space
11387 in a uniform fashion.
11388 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11389 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11390 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11391 equally between themselves.
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11398 \begin_layout Quote
11400 This is on the left side
11401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11404 This is on the right
11407 \begin_layout Quote
11410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 That was an example in the
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11455 is one in a standard paragraph.
11456 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11460 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11472 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11560 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11562 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11563 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11567 option in the space dialog.
11575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11579 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11598 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11605 What is correct English?:
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11673 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11680 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11707 That is why it is named
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11717 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11725 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11730 \begin_inset Index idx
11733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11754 There you find the following sizes:
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11770 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11771 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11776 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 \begin_inset Index idx
11790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 Document ! Settings
11796 for the paragraph separation.
11797 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11824 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11829 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11830 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11839 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 s are described in section
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11855 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11864 If there are several
11868 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11869 You can therefore use
11873 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11881 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11895 \begin_layout Standard
11896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11907 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11920 Paragraph Alignment
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 Paragraph ! Alignment
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11936 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 dialog (toolbar button
11942 arg "layout-paragraph"
11946 There are five possibilities:
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11957 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11963 \begin_layout Itemize
11971 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12021 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12022 the left and right margins.
12023 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12028 This paragraph is right aligned,
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 this one is centered,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is left aligned.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 Page breaks ! Forced
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12065 force a page break where you want one.
12066 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12067 is good at page breaking.
12068 Only if you use a lot of
12072 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12077 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12078 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12082 have to change the page breaking.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12088 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12111 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12112 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12117 at the top of a page.
12118 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12120 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12121 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12122 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12130 to learn more about
12137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12141 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 Page breaks ! Clear
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12160 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12161 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12162 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12163 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12178 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12193 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12196 \begin_layout Subsection
12198 \begin_inset Index idx
12201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12210 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12217 \begin_layout Standard
12218 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12220 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12237 arg "newline-insert newline"
12241 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12261 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12263 This is useful to avoid
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12274 \begin_layout Standard
12275 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12278 very good at line breaking.
12279 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12280 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12287 reference "sec:Quote"
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Verse"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12308 \begin_layout Subsection
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12312 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12317 \begin_inset Index idx
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12354 you can insert horizontal lines.
12355 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12356 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12357 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12373 \begin_layout Section
12374 Characters and Symbols
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12379 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12380 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12388 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12392 for information on how this is done.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12401 dialog via the menu
12403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12419 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12420 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12422 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12430 \begin_layout Section
12431 Fonts and Text Styles
12432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12434 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12441 \begin_layout Subsection
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 There are two types of fonts:
12459 \begin_layout Description
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 characters) in the font.
12480 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12481 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12482 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12483 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12484 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12485 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12486 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12487 \begin_inset Newline newline
12490 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12491 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12492 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12493 sizes than at small ones.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_layout Description
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Index idx
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12532 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12533 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12534 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12535 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12536 image manipulation program.
12537 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12538 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12542 pixels high up to 34
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12546 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12547 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12548 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12550 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12551 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12552 \begin_inset Newline newline
12555 Bitmap fonts are named
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12568 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12569 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12570 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12571 use scalable fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12580 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12581 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12582 font to emphasize text, you use an
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12591 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12593 In \SpecialChar LyX
12594 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12598 \begin_layout Subsection
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 used its own fonts.
12613 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12614 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12619 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12620 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12621 to a word processor.
12622 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12623 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 files are very portable across
12625 different machines.
12626 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 has increased a lot
12628 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12631 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12644 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 code in the document
12646 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 engines that are also able directly
12652 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12654 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12656 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12658 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12659 that is installed on your system.
12660 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12673 es; so you might have to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Subsection
12682 Document Font and Font size
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12685 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can set the document fonts in the
12715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 Document ! Settings
12733 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12734 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12746 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12751 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12759 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12760 This requires that you use
12772 as the output format, i.
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset space \space{}
12780 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 installed (see section
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12796 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12797 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12802 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12803 cannot determine the family.
12804 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12805 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12808 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12811 \begin_layout Standard
12812 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12813 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12818 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12825 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12852 European Computer Modern
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12874 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12875 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12888 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12894 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12895 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12898 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12907 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12926 community in order to replace
12930 as the default font.
12931 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12932 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 One difference is improved kerning.
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 fonts in (the rare) case that
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12993 Virtual means that it
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 -glyphs from other fonts.
13006 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13039 -packages ! aeguill
13044 with the document preamble line
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13052 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 will fix the guillemet problem.
13063 and that accented characters are not
13067 glyph, but built of
13071 characters, the accent and the letter.
13072 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13078 If you search for example for the French word
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13086 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 and not for the glyph
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13111 If you do not like the look of
13119 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13140 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13144 serif and typewriter fonts,
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13149 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13165 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13206 but you can also select your own.
13207 \begin_inset Newline newline
13210 The differences between roman,
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13222 fonts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 was originally designed for newspapers.
13246 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13247 into the small newspaper columns.
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13256 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13259 \begin_layout Standard
13260 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13273 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13278 depends on the class you are using.
13279 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Note that the font size is the
13288 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13289 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13290 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13291 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13314 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13328 serif or typewriter.
13333 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13343 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13351 LaTeX font encoding
13353 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 -packages ! fontenc
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13377 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13382 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13383 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13393 Use Old Style Figures
13397 Use True Small Caps
13400 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13405 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13407 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13415 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13419 Use True Small Caps
13421 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13422 of scaled capitals.
13423 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13424 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13433 a font to display the script characters.
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 So this has no effect for the document language
13468 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13485 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13486 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13488 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 dialog, see section
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13512 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13517 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13520 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13521 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13522 choose a math font in the dialog
13524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 Document ! Settings
13538 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13539 automatically selects a math font.
13540 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13561 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13562 document font is available.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 Note that the math font will not be used for
13570 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13576 or by the insertion of the command
13583 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13589 while the math characters do not.
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13594 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 in the document font settings.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13615 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13616 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13617 font (in most cases
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13634 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13654 \begin_layout Subsection
13655 Using Different Character Styles
13656 \begin_inset Index idx
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13680 automatically changes the character style for certain
13681 paragraph environments.
13683 supports two character styles,
13692 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 style, do one of the following:
13704 \begin_layout Itemize
13705 click on the toolbar button
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 use the key binding
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 These commands are all toggles.
13730 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 One typically uses the
13738 style for proper names.
13740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 A more widely used character style is the
13761 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13768 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 clicking on the toolbar button
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 using the keybindings
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 use a different font.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 We've been using the
13803 style all over the place in this document.
13804 Here's one more example:
13807 \begin_layout Quotation
13810 Do not overuse character styles!
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13815 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13816 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13817 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13832 \begin_inset space ~
13835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 arg "dialog-show character"
13847 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 Fine-Tuning with the
13853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13855 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13875 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13876 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13877 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13878 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13879 from ordinary dialog.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13884 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13885 \begin_inset Newline newline
13888 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13889 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 To use custom character styles, open the
13895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 dialog or press the toolbar button
13906 arg "dialog-show character"
13910 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13911 font property that you can choose.
13912 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13920 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13925 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13926 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13927 environments all at once.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 The possible options are:
13965 \begin_layout Labeling
13966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Roman font family.
13972 Normally a serif font.
13973 It's also the default family.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13995 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 This is the Typewriter font family.
14021 arg "font-typewriter"
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 This corresponds to the print weight.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Medium font series.
14048 It's also the default series.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is the Bold font series.
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 As the name implies.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14089 This is the Upright font shape.
14090 It's also the default shape.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14108 s the Italic font shape
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14122 This is the Slanted font shape
14124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14125 , this is different from italic).
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14140 This is the Small caps font shape
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 Alters the text color.
14154 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 , which means that the document default color set in
14165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14177 is used, you can choose between
14254 \begin_inset Index idx
14257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14266 \begin_layout Labeling
14267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14273 the language of the document.
14274 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14275 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14277 \begin_inset Newline newline
14280 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14282 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14283 When using the spell checking (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14294 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 Alters the size of the font.
14304 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14305 proportional to the document font size.
14306 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14307 the details, but a general description of what
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size tiny"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size small"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 It's also the default size.
14444 arg "font-size normal"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size large"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size larger"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size largest"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size huge"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size giant"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14616 arg "font-size increase"
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size decrease"
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14660 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14661 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14663 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14664 — use those instead.
14665 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14668 \begin_layout Labeling
14669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with emphasize on
14690 This might seem like the same as
14694 , but it is actually a bit different.
14700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with Underbar on.
14719 arg "font-underline"
14725 \begin_inset Newline newline
14730 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14731 when you could not change fonts.
14732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14734 because some people
14738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14741 \begin_layout Labeling
14742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14746 \begin_inset space ~
14753 This is text with Double underbar on.
14759 arg "font-underunderline"
14763 \begin_inset Newline newline
14766 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14767 about double underbar.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underwave"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14796 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14807 This is text with Strikeout on.
14813 arg "font-strikeout"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14821 changed in the meantime.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Noun on.
14839 , this is a logical attribute.
14840 Normally it's equivalent to
14843 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14854 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 arg "dialog-show character"
14870 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14871 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14874 arg "textstyle-apply"
14878 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14890 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14891 (suppose you just set the shape to
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14923 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Itemize
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Newline newline
14978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15024 fonts use characters with serifs.
15025 These are the small
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15034 The following example shows the difference:
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 text without serifs
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15051 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15058 \begin_layout Itemize
15063 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15064 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15065 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15077 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15080 \begin_inset space ~
15085 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15086 the property to be removed.
15087 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15088 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15089 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15108 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 If you, for example, set
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15160 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15172 \begin_layout Standard
15173 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15174 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15177 \begin_layout Section
15178 Printing and Previewing
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15187 using \SpecialChar LyX
15188 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15189 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15190 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15191 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15193 Additional Features
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15200 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15204 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15205 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15209 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15210 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 to turn your writing into printable output.
15212 This happens in two stages:
15215 \begin_layout Enumerate
15216 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 a file with the extension,
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to use the commands in the
15241 file to produce printable output.
15244 \begin_layout Subsection
15245 Output file formats
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15258 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 Simple text (ASCII)
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15271 File formats ! ASCII
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15316 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15317 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15318 bibliography (section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15330 If your document includes such material, use
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15361 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15362 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15368 \begin_inset Index idx
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -Errors or to process it manually
15400 with console commands.
15401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15403 's temporary directory whenever you
15404 view or export your document.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file using the menu
15411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 export variants are explained in section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Export"
15431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 This file type has the extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15468 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15469 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15475 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15476 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15477 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15478 when you view the DVI.
15479 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 The latter option uses the program
15502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15511 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15512 font access (see section
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15525 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 File formats ! PostScript
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 PostScript was developed by the company
15562 as a printer language.
15563 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15565 PostScript can be seen as a
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 programming language
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15585 \begin_inset Index idx
15588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15590 -packages ! pstricks
15600 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 Encapsulated PostScript
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 (EPS, file extension
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 As \SpecialChar LyX
15626 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15627 convert them in the background to EPS.
15628 If, for example, you have 50
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15632 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15638 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15640 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15641 EPS to avoid this problem.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15679 This file type has the extension
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Document Format
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 was derived from PostScript.
15705 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15715 looks exactly the same.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (JPG, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 Portable Network Graphics
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 (PNG, file extension
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15773 converts them in the
15774 background to one of these formats.
15775 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15776 will slow down your workflow.
15777 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 \begin_layout Description
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15810 ) This uses the program
15812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15815 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 is a new engine, derived from
15825 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15826 access (see section
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15844 \begin_layout Description
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15853 ) This uses the program
15858 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15864 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15865 font access (see section
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15877 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15878 vertically written Japanese.
15881 \begin_layout Description
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15886 (cropped) This is the same as
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15894 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15895 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15896 to generate good-looking
15897 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15900 \begin_layout Description
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15905 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15909 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15922 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15923 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15927 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15928 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15931 \begin_layout Standard
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15944 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15945 works without problems.
15946 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15947 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15964 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15974 \begin_inset Index idx
15977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15978 FileFormats ! XHTML
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 This file type has the extension
15998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16011 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16012 When \SpecialChar LyX
16013 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16014 suitable for the purpose.
16015 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 between different formats, which are described in section
16023 Math Output in XHTML
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 XHTML output remains
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16046 features are supported yet.
16050 and the World Wide Web
16054 Additional Features
16056 manual, for more information.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 \begin_layout Subsection
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16085 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16094 or use the toolbar button
16101 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16102 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16103 \begin_inset space ~
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16113 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16121 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16126 Further output formats can be selected via
16128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 View (Other Formats)
16131 or the toolbar button
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16142 viewer window using the menu
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Update (Other Formats)
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 To have a real output, export your document.
16162 \begin_layout Section
16163 A few Words about Typography
16164 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 In \SpecialChar LyX
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character comes in four lengths: the
16226 , and the minus sign:
16227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16234 \begin_inset Tabular
16235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 \begin_inset space ~
16376 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16437 \begin_layout Standard
16438 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 character multiple times in a row.
16451 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16452 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16487 math mode and has a length of its own.
16488 Here are some examples:
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16492 line- and page-breaks
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 Oh — there's a dash.
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16556 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16565 but automatically in the output.
16566 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 following the rules of the document language.
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16587 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16591 font and with unusual constructs, like
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16602 This is done with the menu
16604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16613 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16621 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 would then see the hyphen
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 as a hyphenation possibility.
16641 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16642 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16643 as described in section
16645 Prevent Hyphenation
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16658 \begin_layout Subsection
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16673 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16676 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 When \SpecialChar LyX
16685 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 appropriate amount of space.
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16700 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16701 gets after another word.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16706 not work in all cases.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16720 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16723 \begin_layout Standard
16724 Here are some examples of
16728 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 this is too much space!
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16767 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_inset space ~
16776 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 Spaces ! inter-word
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16809 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16816 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16859 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16860 This function is also bound to
16863 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16879 \begin_inset space \space{}
16882 this is too much space!
16885 \begin_layout Itemize
16886 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16892 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16894 will take care of this.
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16908 feature described in the section
16910 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16915 Additional Features
16920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16922 \begin_inset Index idx
16925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16926 Typography ! Quotes
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 usually sets quotes correctly.
16969 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16970 and use a closing quote at the end.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16980 The keyboard character,
16984 , generates this automatically.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can specify what character the
16992 key produces using the submenu
16998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 Document ! Settings
17016 There are six choices:
17019 \begin_layout Labeling
17020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_layout Labeling
17044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17051 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17056 Use quotes like ”this”
17059 \begin_layout Labeling
17060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17063 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17067 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17073 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17083 \begin_layout Labeling
17084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17087 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17101 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17107 \begin_layout Labeling
17108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17111 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17121 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17125 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17131 \begin_layout Labeling
17132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17135 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17139 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17149 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17155 \begin_layout Standard
17156 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17159 arg "quote-insert single"
17165 \begin_layout Subsection
17167 \begin_inset Index idx
17170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 Typography ! Ligatures
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17211 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17220 print them as single characters.
17221 These groups are known as
17226 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17227 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17229 Here are the standard ligatures:
17232 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17256 \begin_layout Standard
17257 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17258 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 To break a ligature, use
17284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_layout Subsection
17332 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17347 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17358 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17365 \begin_layout Description
17367 The name of the game.
17370 \begin_layout Description
17372 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17376 \begin_layout Description
17378 The \SpecialChar TeX
17379 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17383 \begin_layout Description
17384 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17385 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17396 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17405 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17406 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17407 converges to the number
17408 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17411 : The actual version is
17412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17420 , the previous one was
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 \begin_layout Subsection
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17448 space between two words.
17449 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17459 for units use the menu
17461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17472 arg "space-insert thin"
17478 \begin_layout Standard
17479 Here is an example to show the differences:
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 \begin_inset Tabular
17484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17485 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17498 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 space between number and unit
17517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17526 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 half space between number and unit
17551 \begin_layout Subsection
17553 \begin_inset Index idx
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17566 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17568 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17569 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17570 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17571 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17572 These bits of text became known as
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17585 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17586 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17587 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17588 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17589 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17590 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17591 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17592 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17593 \begin_inset Newline newline
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17613 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17614 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17622 key "latexcompanion"
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17637 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17638 's page break mechanism.
17641 \begin_layout Chapter
17642 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17645 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17653 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17662 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17665 \begin_layout Section
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17686 \begin_layout Standard
17688 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17691 \begin_layout Description
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17697 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17698 \begin_inset Newline newline
17702 \begin_inset Note Note
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17714 \begin_layout Description
17715 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17716 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17717 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset Newline newline
17733 \begin_inset Note Comment
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17746 \begin_layout Description
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17751 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17752 set in the document settings under
17754 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17766 \begin_inset Newline newline
17770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17780 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17785 of a comment that appears in the output.
17791 \begin_inset Newline newline
17795 \begin_inset Newline newline
17798 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17802 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17814 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17817 \begin_layout Section
17819 \begin_inset Index idx
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17831 name "sec:Footnotes"
17838 \begin_layout Standard
17840 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17846 or the toolbar button
17849 arg "footnote-insert"
17861 \begin_inset Graphics
17862 filename clipart/footnote.png
17871 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17872 's representation of your footnote.
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17901 label, the box will
17905 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17906 Clicking on the box label again will close
17919 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17920 and click on the footnote
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17936 Here is an example footnote:
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17955 position where the footnote box is placed.
17956 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17957 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17958 according to the document class.
17960 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17961 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17967 ey are described in the
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Section
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17992 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17999 \begin_layout Standard
18000 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18002 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18011 or the toolbar button
18014 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 appearing within your text.
18041 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18042 's representation of your margin
18051 \begin_layout Standard
18052 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18056 \begin_inset Marginal
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 This is a marginal note.
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18070 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18071 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18072 pages, right on odd pages.
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Section
18096 Graphics and Images
18097 \begin_inset Index idx
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset Index idx
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18119 name "sec:Graphics"
18126 \begin_layout Standard
18127 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18128 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18131 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18140 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18149 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18150 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18152 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18159 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18166 \begin_layout Standard
18171 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18172 of the image in the output.
18173 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18203 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18204 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18225 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18228 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18238 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18239 with the image size is printed.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18243 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18244 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18246 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18251 \begin_inset Graphics
18252 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18261 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18262 the image into a float, see section
18263 \begin_inset space ~
18267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18269 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18278 \begin_inset Index idx
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18290 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 You can insert images in any known file format.
18299 But as we explained in section
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18306 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18310 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18312 therefore uses the program
18316 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18317 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18318 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18325 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18332 \begin_layout Standard
18333 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18336 \begin_layout Description
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18342 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18343 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 Graphics Interchange Format
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 (GIF, file extension
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 Portable Network Graphics
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 (PNG, file extension
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 (JPG, file extension
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_layout Description
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18519 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18521 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18522 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18523 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18524 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 Scalable image formats can be
18528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 Scalable Vector Graphics
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 (SVG, file extension
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 \begin_inset Index idx
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 Encapsulated PostScript
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 (EPS, file extension
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18635 Portable Document Format
18636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18639 (PDF, file extension
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18652 \begin_inset Index idx
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18670 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18671 result will not be scalable.
18672 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18694 \begin_layout Subsection
18695 Grouping of Image Settings
18696 \begin_inset Index idx
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 Images ! Settings grouping
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18709 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18711 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18712 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18714 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18715 need to manually change each of them.
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18720 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18749 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18750 and checking the name of the desired group.
18753 \begin_layout Section
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18778 arg "tabular-insert"
18783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18787 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18788 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18789 from the rest of the table.
18790 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18791 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18793 Here is an example table:
18796 \begin_layout Standard
18798 \begin_inset Tabular
18799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18800 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \begin_layout Subsection
19008 \begin_layout Standard
19009 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19012 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19016 This brings up the table dialog.
19017 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19018 cursor is placed currently.
19019 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19020 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19021 done on all of your selection.
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 In addition to the table dialog, the
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19033 helps you in setting table properties.
19034 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19046 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19047 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19048 current cell respectively.
19049 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19051 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19052 of text, see section
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19059 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19066 \begin_layout Standard
19067 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19068 using the check box
19077 This will merge the cells to
19081 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19082 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19083 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19084 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19085 in the last row without the upper border:
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19090 \begin_inset Tabular
19091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19092 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19116 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19229 -arguments for the table.
19230 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19231 explained in the chapter
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19244 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19245 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19246 but are visible in the output.
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 Most DVI-viewers are
19262 able to display rotations.
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19275 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19280 adds lines for all cell borders.
19283 \begin_layout Subsection
19285 \begin_inset Index idx
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 Tables ! Multi-page
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19308 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19328 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19329 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19332 \begin_layout Description
19337 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19338 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19339 Except for the first page, if
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19350 \begin_layout Description
19354 \begin_inset space ~
19359 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19360 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19363 \begin_layout Description
19368 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19369 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19370 except for the last page, if
19373 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_layout Description
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19390 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19391 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19394 \begin_layout Description
19395 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19396 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19402 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19413 \begin_layout Standard
19414 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19415 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19416 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19422 In this context, first means first in this order:
19425 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19442 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19445 \begin_layout Standard
19447 \begin_inset Tabular
19448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19449 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19450 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19452 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19453 <row endfirsthead="true">
19454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19465 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <row endfirsthead="true">
19485 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <row endhead="true">
19518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <row endhead="true">
19549 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <row endfoot="true">
19582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19633 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <row endlastfoot="true">
21564 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 \begin_layout Subsection
21603 \begin_inset Index idx
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21615 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21622 \begin_layout Standard
21623 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21624 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21625 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21626 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21630 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21633 \begin_layout Standard
21634 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21635 for the column in the table dialog.
21636 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21637 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21643 \begin_inset Tabular
21644 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21645 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21647 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 This is longer now.
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21850 This is longer now.
21855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 \begin_layout Standard
21882 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21883 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21889 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21895 Selection with the mouse or with
21899 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21900 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21901 the selection from outside the table.
21904 \begin_layout Section
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21925 \begin_layout Subsection
21929 \begin_layout Standard
21930 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21931 have a fixed location.
21933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21940 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21948 \begin_inset space ~
21953 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21954 too many notes on the current page.
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21958 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21959 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21960 and pages without text.
21961 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21962 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21963 Floats are therefore numbered.
21964 Referencing is described in section
21965 \begin_inset space ~
21969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21971 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21978 \begin_layout Standard
21979 To insert a float, use the menu
21981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21985 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21986 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21988 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21989 \begin_inset Index idx
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21999 paragraph within the float.
22000 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22001 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22002 left-clicking on the box label.
22003 A closed float box looks like this:
22004 \begin_inset Graphics
22005 filename clipart/float.png
22010 – a gray button with a red label.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22016 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22019 \begin_layout Subsection
22021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22023 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22028 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 Floats ! Figure floats
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22048 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22052 was created using the menu
22054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22055 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22061 arg "float-insert figure"
22065 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22074 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22078 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22079 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22083 \begin_inset space ~
22091 arg "layout-paragraph"
22097 \begin_layout Standard
22098 \begin_inset Float figure
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 \begin_inset Graphics
22106 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22121 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22125 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22138 \begin_layout Standard
22139 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22140 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22151 ) and refer to it using the menu
22153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22163 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22164 vague references like
22165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22172 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22173 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22183 For more about cross-references, see section
22184 \begin_inset space ~
22188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22190 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22198 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22199 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22200 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22201 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22202 as described in section
22203 \begin_inset space ~
22207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22209 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22215 \begin_inset space ~
22219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22221 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22225 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22226 You can also set the images one below the other.
22228 \begin_inset space ~
22232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22234 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22241 reference "fig:Platypus"
22245 are the subfigures.
22248 \begin_layout Standard
22249 \begin_inset Float figure
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22259 \begin_inset Float figure
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22270 name "fig:Undefinable"
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \begin_inset Graphics
22284 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22299 \begin_inset Float figure
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22310 name "fig:Platypus"
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_inset Graphics
22324 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22336 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22348 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22352 Two distorted images.
22365 \begin_layout Subsection
22367 \begin_inset Index idx
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 Floats ! Table floats
22379 \begin_layout Standard
22380 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22383 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22386 or the toolbar button
22389 arg "float-insert table"
22393 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22394 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22395 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22397 \begin_inset space ~
22401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22403 reference "tab:Table-float"
22410 \begin_layout Standard
22411 \begin_inset Float table
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22422 name "tab:Table-float"
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_inset Tabular
22437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22438 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22441 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22592 \end{array}\right]$
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22634 \begin_layout Subsection
22636 \begin_inset Index idx
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22650 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22651 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22652 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22654 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22662 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_layout Section
22672 \begin_inset Index idx
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 \begin_layout Standard
22686 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22688 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22689 \begin_inset space \space{}
22696 \begin_layout Standard
22697 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22698 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22704 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22705 and its alignment within the page.
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22720 height_special "totalheight"
22725 backgroundcolor "none"
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 This is a minipage.
22732 The text is set in an italic style.
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22739 another formatting.
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22751 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22755 as described in section
22756 \begin_inset space ~
22760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22762 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22767 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22784 height_special "totalheight"
22789 backgroundcolor "none"
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22794 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22800 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22804 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22814 height_special "totalheight"
22819 backgroundcolor "none"
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22824 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22832 \begin_layout Standard
22833 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22839 \begin_layout Standard
22840 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22842 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22849 \begin_inset space ~
22857 \begin_layout Chapter
22858 Mathematical Formulas
22859 \begin_inset Index idx
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 \begin_inset Index idx
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22903 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22910 \begin_layout Standard
22911 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22916 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22919 \begin_layout Section
22921 \begin_inset Index idx
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22947 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22949 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22950 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22951 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22960 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22964 \begin_inset space ~
22969 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22974 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22978 This is a line with an inline formula
22979 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22987 paragraph, like this one:
22988 \begin_inset Formula
22995 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22998 \begin_layout Standard
23000 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23002 For example, typing
23003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23016 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23017 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23021 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23024 \begin_inset space ~
23032 \begin_layout Subsection
23033 Navigating in Formulas
23034 \begin_inset Index idx
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23048 achieved with the arrow keys.
23050 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23051 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23056 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23061 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23068 \end{array}\right]$
23076 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23081 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23082 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23090 , printed in this document as
23091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23095 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23102 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23103 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23104 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23109 For example, if you want
23110 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 , since in the latter case only the
23140 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23145 will be under the square root sign:
23146 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23152 \begin_layout Standard
23153 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23155 \begin_inset Formula
23157 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23166 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23167 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23170 \begin_layout Subsection
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23176 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23180 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23181 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23182 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23183 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23184 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23188 \begin_layout Subsection
23189 Exponents and Subscripts
23190 \begin_inset Index idx
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_inset Index idx
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 \begin_layout Standard
23213 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23216 arg "math-superscript"
23222 arg "math-subscript"
23225 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23227 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23230 , type in a formula
23233 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23243 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23249 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23253 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23259 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23265 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23274 , you have to use an extra
23278 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23279 For example, if you want
23280 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23292 Subscripts are similar: To get
23293 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23299 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23307 \begin_layout Subsection
23309 \begin_inset Index idx
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_layout Standard
23322 Create a fraction either with the command
23328 or by using the icon
23331 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23337 \begin_inset space ~
23343 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23344 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23345 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23350 To move back up, press
23355 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23356 \begin_inset Formula
23358 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23361 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23369 \begin_layout Subsection
23371 \begin_inset Index idx
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_layout Standard
23384 Roots can be created using the
23387 \begin_inset space ~
23395 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23401 arg "math-insert \\root"
23423 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23429 always produces a square root.
23432 \begin_layout Subsection
23433 Operators with Limits
23434 \begin_inset Index idx
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 \begin_inset Index idx
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23456 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23463 \begin_layout Standard
23465 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23469 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23472 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23473 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23474 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23475 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23476 The sum operator will automatically place its
23477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23484 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23486 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23490 \begin_inset Formula
23492 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23497 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23504 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23505 behind the operator and using the menu
23507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23508 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23514 \begin_inset space ~
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23538 \begin_inset Index idx
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_inset Formula
23550 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23555 which will place the
23556 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23568 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23569 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23576 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23583 Have a look at section
23584 \begin_inset space ~
23588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23590 reference "subsec:Functions"
23594 for an explanation of function macros.
23597 \begin_layout Subsection
23599 \begin_inset Index idx
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 \begin_layout Standard
23612 Most math symbols can be found in the
23615 \begin_inset space ~
23620 under one of several categories; including
23637 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23643 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23644 don't have to use the
23647 \begin_inset space ~
23652 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23654 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23657 \begin_layout Subsection
23659 \begin_inset Index idx
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 \begin_layout Standard
23672 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23678 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23692 arg "math-insert \\space"
23696 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23697 For example, the sequence
23702 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23705 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23707 \begin_inset Graphics
23708 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23713 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23714 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23715 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23716 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23717 , because they are negative
23719 Here are two examples:
23722 \begin_layout Standard
23732 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23748 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23754 \begin_layout Subsection
23756 \begin_inset Index idx
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23768 name "subsec:Functions"
23775 \begin_layout Standard
23779 \begin_inset space ~
23784 contains under the button
23787 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23790 a number of function macros, such as
23791 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23795 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23803 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23810 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23811 avoid confusions, because
23812 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23816 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23822 \begin_layout Standard
23823 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23825 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23829 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23835 \begin_layout Standard
23836 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23837 are placed, as described in section
23838 \begin_inset space ~
23842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23844 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23851 \begin_layout Subsection
23853 \begin_inset Index idx
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 \begin_layout Standard
23866 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23868 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23869 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23870 commands, for example, to enter
23871 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23874 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23875 Our example is entered by typing
23880 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23887 \begin_inset space ~
23891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23893 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23897 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 \begin_inset Float table
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23912 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23916 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 \begin_inset Tabular
23927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23928 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24517 \begin_inset space ~
24525 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24528 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24532 \begin_layout Section
24533 Brackets and Delimiters
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24556 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24563 \begin_layout Standard
24564 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24566 For some purposes, using just the keys
24571 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24572 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24573 toolbar delimiter icon
24576 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24580 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24581 \begin_inset Formula
24583 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24591 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24592 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24596 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24599 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24615 \begin_layout Standard
24616 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24617 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24621 \begin_layout Standard
24622 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24623 left side and right side.
24624 If you use the option
24627 \begin_inset space ~
24632 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24633 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24635 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24640 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24641 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24646 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24647 is to go inside the brackets.
24648 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24653 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24654 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24655 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24659 arg "math-delim ( )"
24665 \begin_layout Section
24666 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24667 \begin_inset Index idx
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 \begin_inset Index idx
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 \begin_inset Index idx
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24712 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24716 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24717 Here is an example:
24718 \begin_inset Formula
24720 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24729 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24730 \begin_inset space ~
24734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24736 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24741 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24742 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24743 This alignment is set in the box
24748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24797 for every column as default.
24798 For example, the sequence
24799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24810 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24811 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24812 corresponds to the relevant column.
24813 The result will look like this:
24814 \begin_inset Formula
24817 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24818 column & has & has\,right\\
24819 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24828 \begin_layout Standard
24829 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24832 arg "newline-insert newline"
24835 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24836 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24841 or the math toolbar.
24844 \begin_layout Standard
24845 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24846 It can be created with the menu
24848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24851 \begin_inset space ~
24863 Here is an example:
24864 \begin_inset Formula
24878 \begin_layout Standard
24879 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24882 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24885 arg "newline-insert newline"
24889 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24894 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24905 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24906 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24907 A new row is created by every further entry of
24910 arg "newline-insert newline"
24914 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24915 Here is an example:
24916 \begin_inset Formula
24918 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24919 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24924 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24925 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24926 \begin_inset Formula
24928 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24936 \begin_layout Standard
24937 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24944 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24945 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24948 reference "eq:asquared"
24953 The other types are described in section
24954 \begin_inset space ~
24958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24960 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24967 \begin_layout Section
24968 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24969 \begin_inset Index idx
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24973 Math ! Formula numbering
24979 \begin_inset Index idx
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 Math ! Referencing formulas
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24991 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25002 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25004 \begin_inset space ~
25008 \begin_inset space ~
25016 arg "math-number-toggle"
25020 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25021 within parentheses.
25022 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25023 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25024 the document class.
25025 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25026 separated by a dot:
25027 \begin_inset Formula
25037 arg "math-number-toggle"
25040 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25041 You can only number displayed formulas.
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25048 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25062 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25065 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25066 \begin_inset Formula
25069 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25075 To number all lines use the shortcut
25078 arg "math-number-toggle"
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25088 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25089 A label is inserted with the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25100 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25101 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25102 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25114 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25115 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25116 We inserted in the following example the label
25117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25124 in the second line:
25125 \begin_inset Formula
25127 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25128 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25133 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25134 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25135 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25139 \begin_inset space ~
25147 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25151 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25152 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25153 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25154 as the formula number:
25157 \begin_layout Standard
25158 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25161 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25170 's cross-reference box are described in section
25171 \begin_inset space ~
25175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25177 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25182 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25190 \begin_layout Section
25191 User defined math macros
25192 \begin_inset Index idx
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_layout Standard
25206 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25207 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25208 Math macros are explained in section
25211 \begin_inset space ~
25223 \begin_layout Section
25227 \begin_layout Subsection
25229 \begin_inset Index idx
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_layout Standard
25242 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25243 To set a font in a formula, use the
25246 \begin_inset space ~
25254 arg "math-insert \\font"
25257 , or enter its command, listed in table
25258 \begin_inset space ~
25262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25264 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25271 \begin_layout Standard
25272 \begin_inset Float table
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25283 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25287 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 \begin_inset Tabular
25298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25299 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25594 \begin_layout Standard
25595 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25596 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25601 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25602 space when you need a space in the box.
25603 Here is an example where
25604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25615 denotes the set of numbers:
25616 \begin_inset Formula
25618 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25626 \begin_layout Standard
25627 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25628 You can, for example, put a character in
25637 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25641 \begin_inset Newline newline
25644 So it is better not to use this feature.
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25649 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25653 \begin_inset Newline newline
25656 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25662 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25663 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25669 \begin_layout Standard
25676 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25685 \begin_inset space ~
25693 \begin_layout Subsection
25695 \begin_inset Index idx
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_layout Standard
25708 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25710 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 arg "math-insert \\font"
25738 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25739 in black instead of blue.
25740 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25741 Here is an example:
25742 \begin_inset Formula
25745 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25746 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25755 \begin_layout Subsection
25757 \begin_inset Index idx
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 \begin_layout Standard
25770 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25771 automatically chosen in most situations.
25789 For most characters,
25797 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25798 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25803 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25804 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25805 thinks are appropriate.
25806 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25809 arg "math-insert \\style"
25813 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25814 For example, you can set
25815 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25818 , which is normally in
25827 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25831 The four styles are used in the following example:
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25839 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25843 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25855 is set in a particular size with the menu
25857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25859 \begin_inset space ~
25864 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25865 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25866 will be adjusted to correspond.
25867 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25882 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25888 \begin_layout Section
25889 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25891 \begin_inset Index idx
25894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 \begin_inset Index idx
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25915 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25916 that are in common use.
25919 \begin_layout Subsection
25920 Enabling AMS-Support
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25925 the document by selecting the checkbox
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25947 \begin_inset Index idx
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25951 Document ! Settings
25959 \begin_inset space ~
25965 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25966 -errors in formulas,
25967 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25970 \begin_layout Subsection
25972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25974 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25979 \begin_inset Index idx
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25991 \begin_layout Standard
25992 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25993 provides a selection of different formula types.
25995 allows you to choose between
26016 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26023 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26026 \begin_layout Chapter
26030 \begin_layout Section
26032 \begin_inset Index idx
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "sec:Cross-References"
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26053 's strengths is cross-references.
26054 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26056 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26057 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26058 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26061 \begin_layout Enumerate
26065 \begin_layout Enumerate
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26068 name "enu:Second-item"
26075 \begin_layout Enumerate
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 or by pressing the toolbar button
26092 A gray label box like this:
26093 \begin_inset Graphics
26094 filename clipart/label.png
26098 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26100 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26136 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26153 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26158 or the toolbar button
26161 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26165 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26166 \begin_inset Graphics
26167 filename clipart/reference.png
26171 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26173 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26186 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26190 \begin_layout Standard
26191 As an alternative to
26193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26196 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26201 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26202 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26204 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26224 reference "enu:Second-item"
26231 \begin_layout Standard
26232 It is recommended to use a protected space
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 described in section
26238 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26244 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26253 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26254 line breaks between them.
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26258 There are six formats of cross-references:
26261 \begin_layout Description
26262 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26265 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26272 \begin_layout Description
26273 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26274 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26286 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26293 \begin_layout Description
26294 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26300 LatexCommand pageref
26301 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26308 \begin_layout Description
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26314 \begin_inset space ~
26317 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26319 LatexCommand vpageref
26320 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26325 \begin_inset Newline newline
26328 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26329 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26330 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26331 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26332 it prints “on the next page”.
26333 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26336 \begin_layout Description
26338 \begin_inset space ~
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26349 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26352 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26357 \begin_inset Newline newline
26360 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26366 ; otherwise it behaves like
26370 \begin_inset space ~
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26383 \begin_layout Description
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26388 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26389 \begin_inset Newline newline
26393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26401 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26411 \begin_inset Index idx
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 -packages ! prettyref
26422 \begin_inset Index idx
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 -packages ! refstyle
26438 \begin_inset Newline newline
26441 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26442 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26445 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26458 is the default and preferred because
26462 supports only English documents.
26463 The format is specified by using the command
26475 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26476 preamble of the document.
26477 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26490 ) can be done with this command
26491 \begin_inset Newline newline
26498 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26503 \begin_inset Newline newline
26506 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26510 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26517 \begin_layout Description
26519 \begin_inset space ~
26522 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26524 LatexCommand nameref
26525 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26532 \begin_layout Standard
26533 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26534 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26536 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26540 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26544 \begin_layout Standard
26545 You can only use the style
26549 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26553 is always possible.
26556 \begin_layout Standard
26557 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26558 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26560 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26567 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26583 \begin_inset space ~
26588 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26589 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26597 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26598 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26601 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 You can change labels at any time.
26609 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26610 do not need to think about this.
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26616 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 References are described in detail in the section
26622 \begin_inset space ~
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26640 \begin_layout Section
26641 Table of Contents and other Listings
26642 \begin_inset Index idx
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 Navigating ! Outline
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 \begin_layout Subsection
26683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26685 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26696 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26698 \begin_inset space ~
26702 \begin_inset space ~
26708 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26710 If you click on it, the
26714 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26715 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26716 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26718 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26725 that is described in section
26726 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26732 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26741 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26743 \begin_inset space ~
26747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26749 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26753 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26761 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26765 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26767 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26770 \begin_layout Subsection
26771 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26774 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26781 \begin_layout Standard
26782 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26784 You can insert them via the
26786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26790 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26793 \begin_layout Section
26794 URLs and Hyperlinks
26795 \begin_inset Index idx
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26805 \begin_inset Index idx
26808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_layout Subsection
26819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26828 \begin_layout Standard
26829 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 \begin_layout Standard
26838 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26840 \begin_inset Flex URL
26843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26860 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26882 \begin_layout Subsection
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26886 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26894 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26899 or with the toolbar button
26906 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26915 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26916 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26919 name "LyX's homepage"
26920 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26924 , an Email address like this:
26925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26927 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26928 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26933 , or a link to a file.
26936 \begin_layout Standard
26937 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26950 to the link target.
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26954 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26955 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26956 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26957 the text style dialog.
26958 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26964 name "LyX's homepage"
26965 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26977 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26986 \begin_inset Newline newline
26994 \begin_inset Newline newline
27001 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27004 \begin_layout Section
27006 \begin_inset Index idx
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27018 name "sec:Appendices"
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 Appendices are created with the menu
27028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27030 \begin_inset space ~
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27040 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27041 as the appendix part of the book.
27042 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27047 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27048 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27049 and the subsection number.
27050 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27056 \begin_inset space ~
27060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27062 reference "chap:Credits"
27067 \begin_inset space ~
27071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27073 reference "subsec:Export"
27080 \begin_layout Section
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27094 name "sec:Bibliography"
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27104 You can include a bibliography database,
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 Known under the name
27110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27113 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27123 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27124 manually, using the paragraph environment
27128 , which was described in section
27129 \begin_inset space ~
27133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27135 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27140 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27141 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27145 use a bibliography database.
27148 \begin_layout Subsection
27149 The Bibliography Environment
27152 \begin_layout Standard
27157 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27159 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27168 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27170 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27189 or the toolbar button
27192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27196 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27197 containing the available citations.
27198 Select one or more keys from the list and
27208 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27209 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27215 entry with surrounding brackets.
27220 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27221 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27237 Companion Second Edition
27240 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27242 key "latexcompanion"
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 The \SpecialChar LyX
27251 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27267 \begin_inset space ~
27275 arg "layout-paragraph"
27279 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27282 \begin_layout Subsection
27283 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27285 \begin_inset Index idx
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 Bibliography ! Databases
27295 \begin_inset Index idx
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27308 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27324 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27325 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27330 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27332 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27333 your working field in a database.
27334 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27335 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27336 list for that document.
27337 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 The database is a text file with the file extension
27343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27354 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27355 The format is explained in
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27362 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27366 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27371 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27372 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27373 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27375 \begin_inset Flex URL
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27389 To use a database, use the menu
27391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27398 \begin_inset space ~
27404 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27405 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27412 Add bibliography to TOC
27414 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27419 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27420 in the document or just the cited references.
27423 \begin_layout Standard
27424 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27436 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27437 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27438 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27439 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27441 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27454 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27467 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27471 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27472 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27474 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27481 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27482 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27488 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 The following variants are possible:
27496 \begin_layout Description
27497 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27498 with other bibliography packages (e.
27499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27503 \begin_inset space \space{}
27510 ), only with the package
27514 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27518 \begin_layout Description
27519 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27520 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27521 with all bibliography packages, except
27526 \begin_layout Description
27527 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27532 , works with all bibliography packages
27535 \begin_layout Standard
27536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27537 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27539 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27542 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 \begin_layout Standard
27556 When you select the option
27558 Sectioned bibliography
27562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27567 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27569 Customizing Bibliographies
27573 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27578 Additional Features
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27585 the two methods of creating them.
27586 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27587 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27588 We used the style file
27592 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27595 \begin_layout Subsection
27597 \begin_inset Index idx
27600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27601 Bibliography ! Citation format
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27611 For this feature you need to enable the option
27617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27621 \begin_inset Index idx
27624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 Document ! Settings
27635 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27636 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27637 style files as explained in
27638 the previous section.
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27643 the citation reference window.
27644 Here is an example where the text
27645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 appears after the reference:
27659 \begin_layout Standard
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27664 key "latexcompanion"
27671 \begin_layout Section
27673 \begin_inset Index idx
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27697 \begin_inset space ~
27702 or the toolbar button
27709 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27710 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27711 by \SpecialChar LyX
27712 as the index entry.
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27727 A light blue box labeled
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27739 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27740 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27745 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27746 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27747 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27748 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27759 \begin_layout Subsection
27760 Grouping Index Entries
27761 \begin_inset Index idx
27764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27774 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27776 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27777 lists under the entry
27778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27786 First we create the entry
27787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27795 \begin_inset space ~
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27801 reference "subsec:Lists"
27806 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27813 reference "sec:Itemize"
27817 , we insert the command
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 for the enumerated list in section
27838 \begin_inset space ~
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27844 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 The exclamation mark
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27860 marks the grouping levels.
27861 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27862 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27863 If we don't have an index entry for
27864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27871 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27874 \begin_layout Subsection
27876 \begin_inset Index idx
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 Index ! Page ranges
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27891 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27892 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27893 an index entry in section
27894 \begin_inset space ~
27898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27900 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27910 Paragraph environments|(
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 and another entry at the end of section
27915 \begin_inset space ~
27919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27921 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Paragraph environments|)
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 respectively start and end the index range.
27960 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27961 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27962 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27963 An example is the index entry
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27967 Document ! Settings
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 \begin_layout Subsection
27976 \begin_inset Index idx
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 Index ! Cross referencing
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27990 We referred for example in the index entry
27991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27999 \begin_inset space ~
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28009 ) to the index entry
28010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28017 in the same section using the entry
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28023 GIF|see{Image formats}
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28029 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28030 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28033 \begin_layout Subsection
28035 \begin_inset Index idx
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 Index ! Entry order
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28048 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28049 follow the rules for the index order.
28050 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28056 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28058 \begin_inset space ~
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28073 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28074 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28103 Dummy entries ! maïs
28109 \begin_inset Index idx
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 Dummy entries ! maître
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28128 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28129 maïs, maison, maître.
28130 To achieve this, we use the command
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28136 previous entry@current entry
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28140 In our case we want to have
28141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28156 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28167 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28169 See the next subsection for an example.
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28173 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28185 to generate the index (see section
28186 \begin_inset space ~
28190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28192 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28201 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28202 -package aeguill in section
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28209 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28213 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28214 -packages although all these index
28215 commands start with
28216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28229 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28234 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28249 \begin_layout Standard
28261 \begin_layout Subsection
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 Index ! Entry layout
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28277 \begin_inset Index idx
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28283 This is an italic dummy entry
28288 You can also format the page number using the character
28289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28296 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28297 -command without a backslash.
28298 We can write for example
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28304 italic page number:|textit
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 to get the page number in italic.
28309 \begin_inset Index idx
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28318 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28319 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28337 \begin_inset space ~
28343 Have a look at section
28344 \begin_inset space ~
28348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28350 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28354 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28371 to generate the index, see section
28372 \begin_inset space ~
28376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28378 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28387 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28392 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28396 key "latexcompanion"
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28409 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28411 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28412 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28413 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28414 If so, put the following in the preamble
28417 \begin_layout Standard
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28440 in the index entry.
28441 \begin_inset Index idx
28444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28445 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28450 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28451 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28452 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28457 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28458 a bold font for all index entries.
28459 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28471 documentation for details,
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28474 key "makeindex,xindy"
28481 \begin_layout Subsection
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28495 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28502 \begin_layout Standard
28503 If the index generation program
28507 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28508 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28512 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28513 distribution, is used.
28517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28522 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28523 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28524 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28525 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28526 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28536 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28538 dialog, see section
28539 \begin_inset space ~
28543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28550 The available options are listed and explained in
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28553 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28558 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28564 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28572 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28573 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28576 \begin_layout Subsection
28580 \begin_layout Standard
28581 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28582 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28590 next to the standard index.
28592 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28593 that add this feature.
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 -packages ! splitidx
28610 package to generate multiple indexes.
28611 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28626 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28627 style, but it also includes
28628 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28629 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28638 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28639 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28645 and select the option
28647 Use multiple Indexes
28654 already contains the standard index
28655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28663 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28664 also appear as a heading) to the
28668 input field and press the
28673 The new index now also appears in the list.
28674 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28675 label color to the new index.
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28689 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28690 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28691 are additional features:
28694 \begin_layout Itemize
28695 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28696 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28699 \begin_layout Itemize
28700 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28701 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28709 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28710 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28711 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28712 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28715 \begin_layout Section
28716 Nomenclature/Glossary
28717 \begin_inset Index idx
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28727 \begin_inset Index idx
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28761 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28770 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28771 called nomenclature or glossary.
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28775 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28782 \begin_inset Index idx
28785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 -packages ! nomencl
28793 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28801 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28806 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28807 and then use the menu
28809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28815 \begin_inset space ~
28820 or the toolbar button
28823 arg "nomencl-insert"
28828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28839 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28844 The first is the term or
28848 that you wish to define.
28853 of the term or symbol.
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28866 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28874 \begin_layout Subsection
28875 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28876 \begin_inset Index idx
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 Nomenclature ! Layout
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28889 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28893 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28900 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28908 \begin_inset Newline newline
28916 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28929 character starts/ends the formula.
28930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28931 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28943 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28955 -syntax is given in section
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28973 \begin_inset space ~
28978 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28980 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28985 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 in this document is:
28993 \begin_inset Newline newline
28998 dummy entry for the character
29003 \begin_inset Newline newline
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29025 font use the command
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29060 \begin_inset space \space{}
29064 \begin_inset Newline newline
29080 \begin_inset Newline newline
29083 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29084 This command will make the font of all symbols
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 If the characters |
29101 \begin_inset space \space{}
29105 \begin_inset space \space{}
29109 \begin_inset space \space{}
29113 \begin_inset space \space{}
29117 \begin_inset space \space{}
29120 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29121 a quote character in front of them.
29122 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29123 LatexCommand nomenclature
29124 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29125 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29132 \begin_layout Subsection
29133 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29134 \begin_inset Index idx
29137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29138 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29148 -code of the symbol
29150 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29152 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29156 LatexCommand nomenclature
29158 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29165 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29169 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29170 LatexCommand nomenclature
29173 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29178 They will be sorted by
29179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29205 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29208 will be sorted before the
29212 since the character
29213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29220 is considered in sorting.
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29227 \begin_inset space ~
29232 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29233 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29235 For the example given, you can insert
29239 in this field for the
29240 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29247 will be located before
29248 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29255 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29269 \begin_layout Subsection
29270 Nomenclature Options
29271 \begin_inset Index idx
29274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 Nomenclature ! Options
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29288 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29289 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29292 \begin_layout Description
29293 refeq Appends the phrase
29294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 to every nomenclature entry, where
29315 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29318 \begin_layout Description
29319 refpage Appends the phrase
29320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 to every nomenclature entry, where
29341 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29344 \begin_layout Description
29345 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29350 class options list in the
29352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29356 In this document the options
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29372 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29377 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29380 \begin_layout Description
29390 \begin_layout Description
29393 nomrefpage Like the
29400 \begin_layout Description
29403 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29412 \begin_layout Description
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29427 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29439 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29440 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29452 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29455 \begin_inset Newline newline
29462 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29467 \begin_inset Newline newline
29471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29486 by their translation.
29489 \begin_layout Subsection
29490 Printing the Nomenclature
29491 \begin_inset Index idx
29494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29495 Nomenclature ! Printing
29503 \begin_layout Standard
29504 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29507 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29523 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29524 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29525 You can choose between these settings:
29528 \begin_layout Description
29529 Default a space of 1
29530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29536 \begin_layout Description
29538 \begin_inset space ~
29542 \begin_inset space ~
29545 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29548 \begin_layout Description
29549 Custom custom space
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29553 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29570 For example, in order to change the name to
29574 , add the following line to the preamble:
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29585 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29588 \begin_layout Subsection
29589 Nomenclature Program
29590 \begin_inset Index idx
29593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29594 Nomenclature ! Program
29600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29602 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29615 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29616 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29618 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29623 by adding options, see section
29624 \begin_inset space ~
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29630 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29635 The available options are listed and explained in
29636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29638 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29645 \begin_layout Section
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29657 \begin_inset Index idx
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29661 Document ! Branches
29667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29669 name "sec:Branches"
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29678 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29679 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29680 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29685 allows you to put text into branches.
29686 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29687 To create a branch, either select the menu
29689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29690 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29693 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29702 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29703 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29704 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29705 and whether the name of the branch should
29706 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29707 (see below for an example).
29708 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29709 to the name of the other) and to add
29710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29722 \begin_inset space ~
29725 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29726 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29731 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29736 where you can choose a branch.
29737 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29743 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 \begin_inset Branch Question
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29772 \begin_layout Standard
29779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29784 Consider for example a file
29785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29792 which has the above branches.
29794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29801 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 branch were inactive,
29826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 branch was active, likewise
29842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29857 branch was active, and
29858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 if both branches were active.
29866 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29877 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29878 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29879 definitions for each branch.
29880 For example you can define for the question branch
29884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29886 -syntax, see section
29887 \begin_inset space ~
29891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29893 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 and for the answer branch
29929 \begin_layout Standard
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 \begin_inset Branch Question
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29986 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_layout Standard
30022 Now it is possible to use the
30026 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30033 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30036 commands to obtain conditional output.
30037 Here is an example formula where only the
30044 \begin_inset Formula
30046 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30054 \begin_layout Standard
30055 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30070 \begin_inset space \space{}
30073 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30075 For this advanced usage, see the
30081 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30086 \begin_layout Section
30088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30090 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30095 \begin_inset Index idx
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30111 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30114 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30116 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30122 \begin_inset Index idx
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30127 -packages ! hyperref
30132 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30133 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30134 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30135 part of the document.
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 The header information in the dialog tab
30144 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30145 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30146 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30147 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30151 \begin_inset space ~
30155 \begin_inset space ~
30160 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30161 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30162 and author entries.
30166 \begin_inset space ~
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30174 \begin_inset space ~
30179 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 You can specify in the dialog tab
30187 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30192 \begin_inset space ~
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30200 \begin_inset space ~
30205 option allows long links to be split;
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30229 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30232 \begin_inset space ~
30237 colors the different links.
30238 The default colors are:
30241 \begin_layout Labeling
30242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30247 for hyperlinks and URLs
30250 \begin_layout Labeling
30251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30259 \begin_layout Labeling
30260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 but you can change these in the field
30274 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30280 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30288 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30289 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30290 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30298 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30299 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30300 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30310 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30311 when opening the PDF.
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30316 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30320 1 will only display the sections.
30323 \begin_layout Standard
30324 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30325 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30331 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30341 \begin_layout Section
30343 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30347 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30354 \begin_layout Subsection
30357 \begin_inset Index idx
30360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30370 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30378 As \SpecialChar LyX
30379 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30380 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30381 commands and constructs,
30384 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30385 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30386 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30387 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30388 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30389 cannot support all packages and
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30394 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30396 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30400 Code box is created by the menu
30402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30404 \begin_inset space ~
30409 or by the toolbar button
30422 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30433 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30435 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30436 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30443 , you can write the command part
30449 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30450 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30454 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30455 Code box behind the word.
30456 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30457 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 \begin_inset Graphics
30463 filename clipart/ERT.png
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 This is a line with a
30480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30512 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30513 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30514 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30515 know that the command is finished.
30523 \begin_layout Subsection
30524 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30526 \begin_inset Argument 1
30529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30530 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30537 \begin_inset Index idx
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30550 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30559 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30560 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30561 uses in the background.
30562 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30563 is based on commands, you can
30564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30572 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30573 any time if you know the right commands.
30574 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30575 is the end of the day.
30576 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30577 all caption labels bold.
30578 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30580 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30584 \begin_layout Standard
30585 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30587 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30589 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30601 \begin_layout Standard
30602 As result you find that the package
30607 \begin_inset Index idx
30610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 -packages ! caption
30618 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30623 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30627 \begin_inset space ~
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30640 usepackage[options]{package name}
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30644 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30645 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30646 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30647 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 In your case the package name is
30656 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30661 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30662 So you add the command
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30670 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30679 For more commands provided by the
30683 package, have a look at its documentation,
30684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30701 For example if you use a
30705 class, you don't need the package
30709 , you can instead write
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30717 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30724 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30725 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30732 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30737 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30739 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30741 Code box as described in the previous
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30746 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30747 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30759 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30780 \begin_inset Note Note
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30792 \begin_layout Left Header
30793 \begin_inset Argument 1
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30816 \begin_inset Note Note
30819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30820 defines the header line as described below
30828 \begin_layout Center Header
30829 \begin_inset Argument 1
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30841 \begin_layout Right Header
30842 \begin_inset Argument 1
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30866 \begin_layout Left Footer
30867 \begin_inset Argument 1
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 \begin_layout Center Footer
30892 \begin_inset Argument 1
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30907 \begin_inset Newline newline
30911 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30917 \begin_layout Right Footer
30918 \begin_inset Argument 1
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 \begin_layout Section
30944 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30947 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30952 \begin_inset Index idx
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 Document ! Header/Footer line
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30979 \begin_inset space ~
30990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30996 \begin_inset space ~
31002 As a second step add in the menu
31004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31005 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31014 Custom Header/Footerlines
31017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31021 This module offers the following 6
31022 \begin_inset space ~
31028 \begin_layout Description
31030 \begin_inset space ~
31034 \begin_inset space ~
31038 \begin_inset space ~
31042 \begin_inset space ~
31046 \begin_inset space ~
31052 \begin_layout Description
31054 \begin_inset space ~
31058 \begin_inset space ~
31062 \begin_inset space ~
31066 \begin_inset space ~
31070 \begin_inset space ~
31076 \begin_layout Standard
31077 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31078 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31083 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31085 \begin_inset space ~
31089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31091 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31095 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31098 \begin_layout Standard
31099 \begin_inset Float figure
31105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31108 \begin_inset Tabular
31109 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31110 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31111 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31113 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31115 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31133 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31177 The normal text on the page goes here.
31178 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31180 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31181 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31186 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31271 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31276 name "fig:Page-layout"
31280 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31293 \begin_layout Standard
31294 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31302 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31311 is set to “Default”.
31312 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31321 \begin_layout Subsection
31325 \begin_layout Standard
31326 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31327 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31328 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31329 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31331 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31333 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31338 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31352 \begin_layout Description
31355 thepage prints the current page number
31358 \begin_layout Description
31361 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31364 \begin_layout Description
31367 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31370 \begin_layout Description
31373 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31374 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31381 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31384 because it usually goes in a left header.
31387 \begin_layout Description
31390 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31391 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31393 It is normally used in the right header.
31396 \begin_layout Subsection
31397 Default header/footer
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31401 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31402 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31403 footer has the page number.
31404 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31405 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31406 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31409 \begin_inset space ~
31417 \begin_layout Subsection
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31422 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31423 Some pages are different.
31424 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31425 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31426 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31427 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31428 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31432 Header and footer decoration line
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 By default, you get a 0.4
31437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31440 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31441 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31453 in the following way:
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31463 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31480 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31490 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31491 \begin_inset space ~
31495 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31505 Several header/footer lines
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31510 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31511 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31513 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31529 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31531 \begin_inset space ~
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31546 headheight}{height}
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31554 is a size in standard units (e.
31555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31559 \begin_inset space \space{}
31567 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31568 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31569 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31570 logfile with the menu
31572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31574 \begin_inset space ~
31582 \begin_inset space ~
31587 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31592 \begin_inset Index idx
31595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31597 -packages ! fancyhdr
31603 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31604 for your header/footer.
31607 \begin_layout Subsection
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31612 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31613 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31614 This example consists of the following definition:
31617 \begin_layout Description
31619 \begin_inset space ~
31628 , empty optional argument
31631 \begin_layout Description
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31636 Header empty, empty optional argument
31639 \begin_layout Description
31641 \begin_inset space ~
31650 in the optional argument
31653 \begin_layout Description
31655 \begin_inset space ~
31664 in the optional argument
31667 \begin_layout Description
31669 \begin_inset space ~
31682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31686 \begin_inset Newline newline
31690 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31697 in the optional argument
31700 \begin_layout Description
31702 \begin_inset space ~
31711 , empty optional argument
31714 \begin_layout Description
31717 headrulewidth set to 2
31718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31725 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31726 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31741 \begin_layout Standard
31742 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 pagestyle{headings}
31762 \begin_inset Note Note
31765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31766 switches back to page style with the default headings
31774 \begin_layout Section
31775 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31778 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31783 \begin_inset Index idx
31786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31793 \begin_inset Index idx
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31807 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31808 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31809 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31812 \begin_layout Subsection
31816 \begin_layout Standard
31817 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31823 \begin_inset Index idx
31826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31828 -packages ! preview-latex
31833 (on some systems named simply
31838 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31846 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31848 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31856 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31857 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31858 -package are automatically
31859 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31863 \begin_layout Subsection
31867 \begin_layout Standard
31868 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31869 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31871 activate the option
31874 \begin_inset space ~
31881 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31891 \begin_inset space ~
31894 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31901 \begin_inset space ~
31914 \begin_inset space ~
31919 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31928 \begin_inset space ~
31936 \begin_inset space ~
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31946 and when you finish
31950 \begin_layout Standard
31951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31959 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31960 generated by activating the option
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31969 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31977 \begin_layout Subsection
31978 Selected document parts
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31982 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31983 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31984 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31985 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31987 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31993 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31994 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31995 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32006 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32018 is explained in section
32020 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32025 \begin_inset space ~
32035 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32036 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32037 the final rotated boxes,
32038 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32039 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32041 Here is the result:
32044 \begin_layout Standard
32045 \begin_inset Preview
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32056 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32062 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32072 height_special "totalheight"
32077 backgroundcolor "none"
32080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32105 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32111 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32133 \begin_layout Standard
32134 Previewing works also for colors.
32135 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32154 is explained in section
32161 \begin_inset space ~
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 \begin_inset Preview
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32200 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32205 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32225 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32232 If \SpecialChar LyX
32233 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32234 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32235 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32236 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32237 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32238 the \SpecialChar TeX
32240 If \SpecialChar LyX
32241 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32242 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32244 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32245 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32246 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32249 \begin_layout Subsection
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32256 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32259 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32261 \begin_inset space ~
32266 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32268 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32270 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32271 's main window, then only this selection
32272 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32273 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32274 the source view window.
32279 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32280 ; but note that if you have
32281 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32283 not just the one which is open at the time.
32286 \begin_layout Section
32287 Advanced Find and Replace
32288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32290 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32295 \begin_inset Index idx
32298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32305 \begin_inset Index idx
32308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32317 \begin_layout Subsection
32321 \begin_layout Standard
32322 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32323 allows for searching of complex,
32324 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32326 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32327 The key-features are:
32330 \begin_layout Itemize
32331 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32332 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32333 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32337 \begin_layout Itemize
32338 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32339 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32340 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32341 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32344 \begin_layout Itemize
32345 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32346 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32347 outside of mathematics environments
32350 \begin_layout Itemize
32351 Search may be widened to a specific
32356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32360 \begin_inset space ~
32363 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32364 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32371 \begin_layout Itemize
32372 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32373 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32378 \begin_inset space ~
32381 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32384 \begin_layout Subsection
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32391 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32404 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32407 ) or the toolbar button
32410 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32416 Advanced Find and Replace
32421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32425 \begin_layout Standard
32431 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32435 \begin_inset space ~
32440 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32443 arg "paragraph-break"
32447 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32448 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32452 arg "paragraph-break"
32455 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32459 searches backwards.
32462 \begin_layout Standard
32466 \begin_inset space ~
32471 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32480 \begin_inset space ~
32485 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32489 Searching for mathematics
32492 \begin_layout Standard
32493 Mathematical formulas, such as
32494 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32497 or something more complex like
32498 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32501 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32506 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32507 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32508 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32509 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32520 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32521 This is done by switching to the
32525 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32530 This way, entering in the
32537 \begin_layout Itemize
32538 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32539 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32542 \begin_layout Itemize
32543 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32544 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32547 \begin_layout Itemize
32548 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32549 of it only within section headings.
32550 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32551 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32555 \begin_layout Itemize
32556 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32557 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32565 The entries made in the
32569 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32572 \begin_inset space ~
32578 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32582 button or alternatively press
32585 arg "paragraph-break"
32592 while the cursor is in the
32595 \begin_inset space ~
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32604 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32606 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32610 \begin_layout Itemize
32611 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32612 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32620 with its typewriter version
32621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32635 \begin_layout Itemize
32636 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32642 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32654 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32661 (you may want to enable the
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32677 options and disable the
32685 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32693 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32694 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32698 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32701 , or occurrences of
32702 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32706 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32712 \begin_layout Subsection
32716 \begin_layout Standard
32717 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32722 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32726 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32735 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32741 This is done with the context menu
32743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32744 Insert Regular Expression
32746 while the cursor is in the
32751 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32752 expression matching rules
32756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32757 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32764 \begin_inset space ~
32767 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32768 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32774 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32775 same text in the document.
32776 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32777 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32780 \begin_layout Enumerate
32781 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32786 editor the fraction
32787 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32791 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32794 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32795 fractions with the given denominator.
32798 \begin_layout Enumerate
32799 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32811 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32816 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32817 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32818 Also, by inserting a
32819 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32822 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32823 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32826 \begin_layout Standard
32827 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32828 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32829 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32832 , and referring back to them through
32833 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32837 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32841 For example, try searching with the regexp
32842 \begin_inset Newline newline
32845 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32848 \begin_inset Newline newline
32851 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32854 \begin_layout Standard
32855 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32858 \begin_layout Standard
32859 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32867 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32868 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32869 sub-expressions is absolute.
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32875 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32878 always refers to the first occurrence of
32879 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32882 in all entered regexps.
32890 \begin_layout Section
32892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32894 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32899 \begin_inset Index idx
32902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32911 \begin_layout Standard
32913 has a built-in spell checker.
32916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32923 key or the toolbar button
32926 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32929 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32930 beginning of the currently selected text.
32931 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32932 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32933 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32934 scrolled so that it is visible.
32935 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32936 n, if any could be found.
32937 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32941 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32942 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32946 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32953 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32954 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32956 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32957 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32968 arg "dialog-show character"
32971 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32973 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32976 \begin_layout Standard
32977 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32978 can be downloaded from here:
32979 \begin_inset Newline newline
32983 \begin_inset Flex URL
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32988 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32994 \begin_inset Newline newline
32998 \begin_inset space ~
33001 files for each language.
33002 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33003 \begin_inset space ~
33006 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33007 's installation subfolder
33015 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33017 \begin_inset Newline newline
33020 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33021 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33022 but in most cases these are
33038 is the language code.
33041 \begin_layout Subsection
33045 \begin_layout Standard
33048 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33049 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33051 \begin_inset space ~
33054 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33057 you can set the following things:
33060 \begin_layout Description
33062 \begin_inset space ~
33065 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33066 should use for spell checking.
33067 Depending on your platform,
33081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33083 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33098 \begin_inset space ~
33101 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33104 \begin_layout Description
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33109 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33110 will always use the given language
33111 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33114 \begin_layout Description
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33119 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33125 \begin_inset space \space{}
33129 This should normally not be needed.
33132 \begin_layout Description
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33138 \begin_inset space ~
33141 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33153 \begin_layout Description
33155 \begin_inset space ~
33158 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33159 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33160 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33161 appear in a context menu.
33162 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33166 \begin_layout Description
33168 \begin_inset space ~
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33179 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33183 \begin_layout Section
33185 \begin_inset Index idx
33188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33197 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33206 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33207 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33219 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33228 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33230 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33231 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33232 which are available for many languages.
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33237 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33241 \begin_layout Subsection
33242 Setting up the thesaurus
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33254 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33258 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33263 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33269 \begin_inset space ~
33277 For instance, the US English files are named:
33280 \begin_layout Itemize
33284 \begin_layout Itemize
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33297 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33298 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33301 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33302 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33303 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33305 \begin_inset space ~
33310 ) to the path where they are installed.
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33315 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33316 ies, typical locations are
33322 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33326 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33330 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33333 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33339 LibreOffice-<Version>
33346 On the Mac, the default location is
33348 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33349 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33350 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33351 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33352 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33353 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33361 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33362 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33363 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33368 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33369 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33373 \begin_layout Itemize
33374 \begin_inset Flex URL
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33387 \begin_layout Standard
33388 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33389 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33392 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33393 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33400 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33402 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33403 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33410 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33413 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33419 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33422 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33423 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33432 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33433 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33440 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33443 \begin_layout Subsection
33444 Using the thesaurus
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33448 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33453 or the toolbar button
33456 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33459 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33461 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33463 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33464 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33465 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33474 ), related terms (such as
33477 \begin_inset space ~
33486 ), compounds (such as
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33498 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33507 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33510 \begin_layout Standard
33511 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33512 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33518 the dictionary, such as the above
33522 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33527 \begin_inset space \space{}
33530 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33531 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33532 For example, looking up the word form
33536 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33541 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33546 \begin_inset space \space{}
33557 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33558 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33559 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33562 \begin_layout Section
33564 \begin_inset Index idx
33567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 \begin_inset Index idx
33577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33578 Document ! Change Tracking
33584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33586 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33595 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33596 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33597 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33604 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33614 \begin_layout Standard
33615 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33629 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33630 You can change the color in
33632 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33633 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33644 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33650 \begin_inset Index idx
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33654 Color ! Change tracking
33659 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33660 's status bar when the
33661 cursor is in changed text.
33662 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33665 arg "changes-merge"
33671 \begin_layout Standard
33672 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33674 \begin_inset Index idx
33677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33693 \begin_layout Standard
33694 \begin_inset Graphics
33695 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33703 \begin_layout Standard
33704 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33711 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33715 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33722 \begin_inset Tabular
33723 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33724 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33725 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33726 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 arg "changes-track"
33744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33755 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33757 \begin_inset space ~
33766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33775 arg "changes-output"
33783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33791 \begin_inset space ~
33794 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33800 \begin_inset space ~
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 Jumps to the next change
33840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33849 arg "change-accept"
33857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33863 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33868 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33870 \begin_inset space ~
33879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 arg "change-reject"
33896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33904 \begin_inset space ~
33907 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33909 \begin_inset space ~
33918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 arg "changes-merge"
33935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33943 \begin_inset space ~
33946 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 arg "all-changes-accept"
33974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33982 \begin_inset space ~
33985 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33987 \begin_inset space ~
33991 \begin_inset space ~
34000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34009 arg "all-changes-reject"
34017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34025 \begin_inset space ~
34028 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34067 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34069 \begin_inset space ~
34078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34101 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34119 \begin_layout Standard
34120 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34147 \begin_layout Standard
34148 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34149 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34150 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34151 the next change after the current cursor position.
34152 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34153 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34154 step to the next change.
34155 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34158 \begin_layout Standard
34159 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34160 to describe a change.
34163 \begin_layout Standard
34164 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34170 \begin_inset Index idx
34173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34175 -packages ! dvipost
34181 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34189 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34193 \begin_layout Section
34194 Comparison of Documents
34195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34197 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34202 \begin_inset Index idx
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34206 Comparison of documents
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34215 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34218 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34222 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34223 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34225 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34227 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34231 \begin_inset space ~
34235 \begin_inset space ~
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34273 enables the change tracking option
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34280 \begin_inset space ~
34284 \begin_inset space ~
34289 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34292 \begin_layout Section
34293 International Support
34294 \begin_inset Index idx
34297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34298 International support
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34307 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34308 with any language you want.
34309 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34310 up \SpecialChar LyX
34312 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34314 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34321 \begin_layout Standard
34322 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34323 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34324 \begin_inset space ~
34328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34330 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34337 \begin_layout Subsection
34339 \begin_inset Index idx
34342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34349 \begin_inset Index idx
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34353 Document ! Settings
34359 \begin_inset Index idx
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34363 Document ! Language
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34378 dialog lets you set
34380 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34390 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34395 \begin_inset space ~
34400 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34401 For details about the different encoding options see section
34402 \begin_inset space ~
34406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34408 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34415 \begin_layout Subsection
34416 Keyboard mapping configuration
34417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34419 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34426 \begin_layout Standard
34427 If you have for example a U.
34428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34431 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34432 can use an alternate keymap.
34433 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34440 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34443 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34450 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34455 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34456 which one you want to use.
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34461 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34462 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34466 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34467 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34468 one to support the characters you want.
34469 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34476 \begin_layout Chapter
34479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34481 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34490 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34491 topic inside the user's guide.
34494 \begin_layout Section
34496 \begin_inset Index idx
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34513 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34516 \begin_layout Subsection
34520 \begin_layout Standard
34521 Creates a new document.
34524 \begin_layout Subsection
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34530 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34531 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34534 \begin_layout Subsection
34538 \begin_layout Standard
34542 \begin_layout Subsection
34546 \begin_layout Standard
34547 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34548 Click there on a file to open it.
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34556 Closes the current document.
34559 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 Closes all opened documents.
34567 \begin_layout Subsection
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34572 Saves the actual document.
34575 \begin_layout Subsection
34579 \begin_layout Standard
34580 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34583 \begin_layout Subsection
34587 \begin_layout Standard
34588 Saves all opened documents.
34591 \begin_layout Subsection
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34599 \begin_layout Subsection
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34605 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34606 It is described in the section
34608 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34613 Additional Features
34618 \begin_layout Subsection
34622 \begin_layout Standard
34623 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34624 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34626 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34627 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34631 \begin_layout Standard
34632 When using the menu entry
34635 \begin_inset space ~
34640 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34644 \begin_inset space ~
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34657 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34658 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34661 \begin_layout Subsection
34663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34665 name "subsec:Export"
34672 \begin_layout Standard
34673 You can export your document to various file formats.
34674 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34676 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34677 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34678 during its configuration.
34681 \begin_layout Standard
34682 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34690 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34697 \begin_layout Description
34703 \begin_inset space ~
34706 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34711 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34712 \begin_inset Newline newline
34715 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34716 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34720 \begin_layout Description
34721 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34727 \begin_layout Description
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34732 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34738 \begin_layout Description
34739 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34740 's native DVI-format.
34741 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34742 files paths or file names in your document.
34744 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34751 \begin_layout Description
34752 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34753 in files paths or file names
34756 \begin_layout Description
34758 \begin_inset space ~
34765 ) DVI-format using the program
34767 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34770 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34782 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34790 \begin_layout Description
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34795 (cropped) the same as
34799 but with cropped page margins.
34802 \begin_layout Description
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34807 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34811 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34816 \begin_layout Description
34820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34836 \begin_layout Description
34838 \begin_inset space ~
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34845 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34849 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34857 \begin_layout Description
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34870 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34871 source that is compilable with the program
34873 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34877 \begin_layout Description
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34886 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34887 source, additionally all images used in the document
34888 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34892 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34895 \begin_layout Description
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34904 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34905 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34906 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34914 \begin_layout Description
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34927 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34928 source that is compilable with the program
34934 \begin_layout Description
34936 \begin_inset space ~
34940 \begin_inset space ~
34947 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34954 \begin_layout Description
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34959 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34960 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34966 \begin_inset space \space{}
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34990 represent the version number)
34993 \begin_layout Description
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35002 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35003 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35004 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35008 \begin_layout Description
35009 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35010 's internal XHTML engine
35013 \begin_layout Description
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35030 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35035 For the conversion the program
35044 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35047 \begin_layout Description
35048 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35053 \begin_layout Description
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35058 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35060 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35063 For the conversion the program
35072 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35075 \begin_layout Description
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35080 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35081 For the conversion the program
35090 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35093 \begin_layout Description
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35098 (cropped) the same as
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35106 but with cropped page margins
35109 \begin_layout Description
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35118 PDF-format using the program
35122 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35125 \begin_layout Description
35129 \begin_inset space ~
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35141 \begin_inset space ~
35146 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35151 \begin_inset space \space{}
35154 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35158 \begin_layout Description
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35167 PDF-format using the program
35169 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35172 , produces PDF-files directly
35175 \begin_layout Description
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35184 PDF-format using the program
35188 , produces PDF-files directly
35191 \begin_layout Description
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35200 PDF-format using the program
35204 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35207 \begin_layout Description
35211 \begin_inset space ~
35216 PDF-format using the program
35221 , produces PDF-files directly
35224 \begin_layout Description
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35236 \begin_layout Description
35240 \begin_inset space ~
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35249 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35250 and then exported as text using the program
35255 \begin_layout Description
35260 PostScript format using the program
35268 options see section
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35275 reference "subsec:General-output"
35282 \begin_layout Description
35283 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35284 source and also code in the statistical programming
35298 it is possible to use
35302 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35306 \begin_layout Standard
35307 If one of the menu entries
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35323 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35325 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35327 \begin_inset space ~
35331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35333 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35338 \begin_inset Index idx
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35342 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35351 \begin_layout Subsection
35355 \begin_layout Standard
35356 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35357 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35360 \begin_inset space ~
35364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35366 reference "sec:Paths"
35371 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35380 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35381 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35382 's preferences as described in section
35383 \begin_inset space ~
35387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35389 reference "subsec:Converters"
35396 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 New and Close Window
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35401 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35405 \begin_layout Subsection
35409 \begin_layout Standard
35410 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35413 \begin_layout Section
35415 \begin_inset Index idx
35418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35427 \begin_layout Subsection
35431 \begin_layout Standard
35432 Described in section
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35439 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35446 \begin_layout Subsection
35447 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 Described in section
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35458 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35471 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35474 \begin_layout Subsection
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 Selects the whole document.
35482 \begin_layout Subsection
35483 Find & Replace (Quick)
35486 \begin_layout Standard
35487 Described in section
35488 \begin_inset space ~
35492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35494 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35501 \begin_layout Subsection
35502 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 Described in section
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35513 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35520 \begin_layout Subsection
35521 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35524 \begin_layout Standard
35525 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35529 \begin_layout Subsection
35533 \begin_layout Standard
35534 Described in section
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35541 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35550 \begin_inset Index idx
35553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35554 Paragraph ! Settings
35562 \begin_layout Standard
35563 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35564 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35570 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35587 \begin_layout Subsection
35588 Table and Rows & Columns
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35592 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35593 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35594 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35597 \begin_layout Subsection
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35602 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35603 It will dissolve this inset.
35604 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35608 \begin_layout Subsection
35612 \begin_layout Standard
35613 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35614 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35617 \begin_layout Subsection
35618 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35624 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35631 reference "sec:Nesting"
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35638 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
35648 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35653 nts of the same type.
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35661 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35665 for an explanation.
35668 \begin_layout Section
35670 \begin_inset Index idx
35673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 At the bottom of the
35687 menu the opened documents are listed.
35690 \begin_layout Subsection
35691 Open/Close all Insets
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35695 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35698 \begin_layout Subsection
35699 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35702 \begin_layout Standard
35703 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35706 \begin_layout Standard
35707 Math macros are described in the
35714 \begin_layout Subsection
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35720 \begin_inset space ~
35724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35726 reference "sec:Navigating"
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35740 \begin_layout Subsection
35744 \begin_layout Standard
35745 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35753 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35760 \begin_layout Subsection
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35765 Opens a window showing console messages.
35766 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35771 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35772 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35773 is processing the document.
35776 \begin_layout Subsection
35778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35780 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35785 \begin_inset Index idx
35788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35797 \begin_layout Standard
35798 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35799 All toolbars and the
35802 \begin_inset space ~
35807 can be turned on and off.
35812 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35824 \begin_inset space ~
35836 \begin_inset space ~
35841 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35845 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35852 \begin_layout Standard
35857 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35861 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35862 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35863 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35864 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35865 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35868 \begin_layout Standard
35870 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35871 \begin_inset space ~
35875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35877 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35884 \begin_layout Subsection
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35904 \begin_inset space ~
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35917 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35918 's main window vertically while
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35946 will split it horizontally.
35947 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35948 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35949 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35950 three or more documents at the same time.
35951 To close a split view, use the menu
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35966 \begin_layout Subsection
35970 \begin_layout Standard
35971 Closes a split view.
35974 \begin_layout Subsection
35978 \begin_layout Standard
35979 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35980 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35981 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35982 's main window fullscreen.
35983 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35984 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35987 \begin_layout Section
35989 \begin_inset Index idx
35992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36001 \begin_layout Subsection
36005 \begin_layout Standard
36006 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36013 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36024 \begin_layout Subsection
36026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36028 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36035 \begin_layout Standard
36036 Here you can insert the following characters:
36039 \begin_layout Description
36044 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36047 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36048 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36049 -packages you have installed.
36050 You can get a complete display by checking
36053 \begin_inset space ~
36059 \begin_inset Newline newline
36063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 Not all characters will be visible in the
36075 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36076 dialog (see section
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36083 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36087 ) can display every character.
36095 \begin_layout Description
36096 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36100 \begin_layout Description
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36109 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36116 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36123 \begin_layout Description
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36128 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36131 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36132 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36138 \begin_layout Description
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36143 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36147 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36153 \begin_layout Description
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36158 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36162 \begin_layout Description
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36167 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36171 \begin_layout Description
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36176 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36182 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36188 \begin_layout Description
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36193 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36197 \begin_layout Description
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_inset Index idx
36206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36213 \begin_inset Index idx
36216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36222 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36223 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36225 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36231 \begin_inset Index idx
36234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 \begin_inset Newline newline
36245 More information about this feature can be found in the
36251 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36257 \begin_layout Description
36258 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36260 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36261 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36265 \begin_layout Subsection
36269 \begin_layout Standard
36270 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36273 \begin_layout Description
36274 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36275 \begin_inset script superscript
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 \begin_layout Description
36287 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36288 \begin_inset script subscript
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36299 \begin_layout Description
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36304 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36311 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36318 \begin_layout Description
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36323 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36324 \begin_inset space ~
36328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36330 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36337 \begin_layout Description
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36342 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36343 \begin_inset space ~
36347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36349 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36356 \begin_layout Description
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36361 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36367 \begin_inset space \space{}
36370 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36371 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36380 To insert a fraction use the command
36385 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36389 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36398 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36405 \begin_layout Description
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36410 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36417 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36424 \begin_layout Description
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36429 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36436 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36443 \begin_layout Description
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36448 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36455 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36462 \begin_layout Description
36463 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36470 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36477 \begin_layout Description
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36482 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36489 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36496 \begin_layout Description
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36501 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36502 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36508 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36515 \begin_layout Description
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36524 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36531 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36538 \begin_layout Description
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36543 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36544 as described in section
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36551 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36558 \begin_layout Description
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36563 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36570 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36577 \begin_layout Description
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36582 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36583 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36598 \begin_layout Description
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36603 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36610 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36617 \begin_layout Description
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36626 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36633 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36640 \begin_layout Subsection
36644 \begin_layout Standard
36645 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36670 are described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:toc"
36686 is described in section
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36693 reference "sec:Index"
36701 is described in section
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36708 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36714 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36717 is described in section
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36724 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36731 \begin_layout Subsection
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 To insert floats, as described in section
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36743 reference "sec:Floats"
36747 and in detail the chapter
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_layout Subsection
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 To insert notes, described in section
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36774 reference "sec:Notes"
36781 \begin_layout Subsection
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36788 Branches are described in section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "sec:Branches"
36802 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36808 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36810 An example is the document class
36811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36818 with three custom insets.
36821 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36825 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36831 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36834 \begin_layout Subsection
36836 \begin_inset Index idx
36839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36851 For more information see chapter
36853 External Document Parts
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_layout Subsection
36864 \begin_inset Index idx
36867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36878 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36893 \begin_layout Subsection
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36902 dialog as described in section
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36909 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36925 as described in section
36926 \begin_inset space ~
36930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36932 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36939 \begin_layout Subsection
36943 \begin_layout Standard
36948 as described in section
36949 \begin_inset space ~
36953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36955 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36962 \begin_layout Subsection
36964 \begin_inset Index idx
36967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 \begin_inset Index idx
36977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36978 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
36986 \begin_layout Standard
36987 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
36988 Floats are described in section
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36995 reference "sec:Floats"
36999 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37001 Multi-page Captions
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37026 reference "sec:Index"
37033 \begin_layout Subsection
37037 \begin_layout Standard
37038 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37045 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37052 \begin_layout Subsection
37056 \begin_layout Standard
37057 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37058 Tables are described in section
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37065 reference "sec:Tables"
37069 and in detail in the chapter
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37094 Graphics are described in section
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37101 reference "sec:Graphics"
37108 \begin_layout Subsection
37112 \begin_layout Standard
37113 Inserts a URL as described in section
37114 \begin_inset space ~
37118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37120 reference "subsec:URLs"
37127 \begin_layout Subsection
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37132 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37139 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37146 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37151 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37158 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37165 \begin_layout Subsection
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37177 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37184 \begin_layout Subsection
37188 \begin_layout Standard
37189 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37190 title or caption of a float.
37191 Inserts a short title as described in section
37192 \begin_inset space ~
37196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37198 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37205 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37212 Code box as described in section
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37219 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37228 \begin_inset Index idx
37231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37240 \begin_layout Standard
37241 Inserts a program listings box.
37242 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37244 Program Code Listings
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_layout Subsection
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37262 Inserts the actual date.
37263 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37267 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37283 \begin_layout Subsection
37287 \begin_layout Standard
37288 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37295 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37302 \begin_layout Section
37304 \begin_inset Index idx
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37316 \begin_layout Standard
37317 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37321 of the current document.
37322 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37325 \begin_layout Subsection
37329 \begin_layout Standard
37330 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37331 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37332 to jump, for example, between section
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37337 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37341 2.5 and use the submenu
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37371 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37375 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37381 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37384 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37397 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37405 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37408 \begin_layout Subsection
37409 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37412 \begin_layout Standard
37413 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37423 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37424 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37440 \begin_layout Subsection
37444 \begin_layout Standard
37445 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37448 The \SpecialChar LyX
37449 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37464 manual for a detailed description.
37467 \begin_layout Section
37469 \begin_inset Index idx
37472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37481 \begin_layout Subsection
37485 \begin_layout Standard
37486 Change Tracking is described in section
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37493 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37500 \begin_layout Subsection
37508 \begin_layout Standard
37509 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37510 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37511 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37513 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37514 to the clipboard or update the view.
37515 \begin_inset Newline newline
37518 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37522 \begin_layout Standard
37525 Open Containing Directory
37527 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37528 's temporary folder for the document.
37529 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37530 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37531 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37532 For example some journals require to send the
37536 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37540 \begin_layout Subsection
37541 Start Appendix Here
37544 \begin_layout Standard
37545 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37546 as described in section
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37553 reference "sec:Appendices"
37560 \begin_layout Subsection
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_layout Standard
37569 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37570 default output format for the document (menu
37572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37573 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37574 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37592 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37596 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37599 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37600 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37602 \begin_inset space ~
37605 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37610 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37612 \begin_inset space ~
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37628 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37632 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37633 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37635 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37636 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37641 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37646 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37656 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37661 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37662 when it is first configured.
37663 The default output format is
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_layout Subsection
37675 View (Other Formats)
37678 \begin_layout Standard
37679 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37680 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37681 actual document with an external program.
37682 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37683 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37684 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37686 All possible formats are listed in section
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37693 reference "subsec:Export"
37698 You should at least see the menu entry
37703 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37705 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37713 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37718 \begin_inset Index idx
37721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37722 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37733 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37735 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37736 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37741 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37746 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37756 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37761 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37762 when it is first configured.
37765 \begin_layout Subsection
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_layout Standard
37774 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37775 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37779 Update (Other Formats)
37782 \begin_layout Standard
37783 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37784 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37788 View Master Document
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37813 manual for more information on this topic).
37814 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37815 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37828 generates the output of the whole book, while
37832 will just output the chapter alone.
37835 \begin_layout Standard
37836 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37837 in the document settings (menu
37839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37840 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37841 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37859 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37863 ) or in the preferences (menu
37865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37866 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37868 \begin_inset space ~
37871 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37876 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37878 \begin_inset space ~
37882 \begin_inset space ~
37888 \begin_inset space ~
37892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37894 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37901 \begin_layout Subsection
37902 Update Master Document
37905 \begin_layout Standard
37906 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37927 manual for more information on this topic).
37928 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37929 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37932 \begin_layout Standard
37933 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37934 in the document settings (menu
37936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37938 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37944 \begin_inset space ~
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37956 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37960 ) or in the preferences (menu
37962 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37963 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37968 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37970 \begin_inset space ~
37973 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37979 \begin_inset space ~
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37991 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37998 \begin_layout Subsection
38000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38002 name "subsec:Compressed"
38009 \begin_layout Standard
38010 Un/compresses the current document.
38011 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38012 compression (see the
38014 Additional Features
38016 manual for details).
38019 \begin_layout Subsection
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38027 \begin_layout Subsection
38031 \begin_layout Standard
38032 The document settings are described in appendix
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38039 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38046 \begin_layout Section
38048 \begin_inset Index idx
38051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38060 \begin_layout Subsection
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 Spell checking is explained in section
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38072 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38079 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_layout Standard
38084 The thesaurus is described in section
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38091 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38098 \begin_layout Subsection
38100 \begin_inset Index idx
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 \begin_inset Index idx
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 \begin_layout Standard
38123 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38124 the highlighted document part.
38127 \begin_layout Subsection
38133 \begin_inset Index idx
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38137 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 Generates with the help of the program
38149 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38152 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38153 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38154 This feature is not available on Windows.
38157 \begin_layout Subsection
38163 \begin_inset Index idx
38166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38182 \begin_inset space ~
38187 to see the full filename paths.
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38192 \begin_inset Index idx
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38204 \begin_layout Standard
38205 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38206 files as described in section
38207 \begin_inset space ~
38211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38213 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38222 \begin_inset Index idx
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38256 \begin_inset Index idx
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38260 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38269 \begin_layout Standard
38270 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38271 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38272 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38273 -packages and programs it needs; see
38275 \begin_inset space ~
38279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38281 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38288 \begin_layout Subsection
38292 \begin_layout Standard
38297 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38304 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38311 \begin_layout Section
38313 \begin_inset Index idx
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38325 \begin_layout Standard
38326 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38327 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38329 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38333 \begin_layout Standard
38337 \begin_inset space ~
38342 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38343 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38344 packages and classes found
38345 by \SpecialChar LyX
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38353 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38360 \begin_layout Standard
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38369 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38374 \begin_layout Section
38376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38378 name "sec:Toolbars"
38385 \begin_layout Standard
38386 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38387 \begin_inset space ~
38391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38393 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38400 \begin_layout Standard
38401 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38402 This is described in the
38404 Additional Features
38409 \begin_layout Subsection
38411 \begin_inset Index idx
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 \begin_layout Standard
38424 \begin_inset Graphics
38425 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38433 \begin_layout Standard
38434 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38458 \begin_inset Note Note
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38462 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38467 manual for more information.
38475 \begin_layout Standard
38476 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38482 \begin_layout Standard
38483 \begin_inset Tabular
38484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38485 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38486 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38487 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38493 \begin_inset Graphics
38494 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 pull-down box for the environments
38521 \begin_layout Standard
38522 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38530 \begin_inset Tabular
38531 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38532 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38533 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38534 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38558 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38588 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38618 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38648 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 arg "spelling-continuously"
38672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 Spellcheck continuously
38682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38795 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38937 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38938 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38966 Emphasize text, function of the
38968 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38973 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39003 Set text to noun style, function of the
39005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39010 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39028 arg "textstyle-apply"
39036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39040 Format text using the current settings in the
39042 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39047 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39080 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 arg "tabular-insert"
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 Toggle outline window on/off,
39172 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39240 \begin_layout Subsection
39242 \begin_inset Index idx
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39255 \begin_inset Graphics
39256 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39265 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39271 \begin_layout Standard
39272 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39276 \begin_layout Standard
39277 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39284 \begin_inset Tabular
39285 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39286 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39287 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39288 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39325 arg "layout Enumerate"
39333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39352 arg "layout Itemize"
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 arg "layout Description"
39414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39433 arg "depth-increment"
39441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39447 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39449 \begin_inset space ~
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 arg "depth-decrement"
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39487 \begin_inset space ~
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39509 arg "float-insert figure"
39517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39540 arg "float-insert table"
39548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39555 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39631 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 arg "nomencl-insert"
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 arg "footnote-insert"
39737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39759 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39808 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39922 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39937 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39953 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39968 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 arg "dialog-show character"
39996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40002 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40007 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 arg "layout-paragraph"
40031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40085 \begin_layout Subsection
40086 View/Update Toolbar
40087 \begin_inset Index idx
40090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Toolbar ! View / Update
40099 \begin_layout Standard
40100 \begin_inset Graphics
40101 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40108 \begin_layout Standard
40109 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40115 \begin_layout Standard
40116 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40121 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40128 \begin_inset Tabular
40129 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40130 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40131 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40132 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 arg "buffer-update"
40180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40202 arg "master-buffer-view"
40210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40236 arg "master-buffer-update"
40244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40274 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40291 Synchronize with Output
40297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40321 View (Other Formats)
40327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40334 arg "update-others"
40342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40349 Update (Other Formats)
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40367 \begin_layout Subsection
40371 \begin_layout Standard
40372 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40373 \begin_inset space ~
40377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40379 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40383 , the table toolbar
40384 \begin_inset Index idx
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40401 manual and the math macro toolbar
40402 \begin_inset Index idx
40405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40418 \begin_layout Chapter
40419 The Document Settings
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40422 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40427 \begin_inset Index idx
40430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 Document ! Settings
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40448 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40449 is called with the menu
40451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40455 You can save your document settings as default with the
40457 Save as Document Defaults
40459 button in any dialog.
40460 This will create a template named
40464 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40465 when you create a new document without
40469 \begin_layout Standard
40474 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40475 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40479 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40480 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40481 to find the one you are looking for.
40482 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40483 the submenus of the dialog.
40485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40489 \begin_inset space \space{}
40493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40500 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40501 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40502 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40505 \begin_layout Section
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40510 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40512 Document classes are described in section
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40519 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40531 \begin_inset space ~
40536 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40541 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40542 as a layout for a document class.
40543 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40545 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40554 \begin_layout Standard
40555 Some classes use special class options by default.
40556 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40560 and you can decide to use them or not.
40561 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40562 recommended you leave them untouched.
40567 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40568 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40573 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40575 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40581 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40582 \begin_inset Newline newline
40587 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40590 \begin_inset Newline newline
40593 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40594 distribution, see section
40599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40601 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40618 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40619 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40620 in the background if the child document
40621 is opened without its master.
40622 This way child documents are always compilable.
40623 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40650 \begin_inset Index idx
40653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 -packages ! prettyref
40661 \begin_inset Index idx
40664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40666 -packages ! refstyle
40671 for cross-references, see section
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40678 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40685 \begin_layout Section
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40691 Please refer to the section
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40707 manual for details.
40710 \begin_layout Section
40714 \begin_layout Standard
40715 Modules are explained in section
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40722 reference "subsec:Modules"
40729 \begin_layout Section
40733 \begin_layout Standard
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40741 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40748 \begin_layout Section
40752 \begin_layout Standard
40753 The document font settings are described in section
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40760 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40767 \begin_layout Section
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40772 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40789 and whether it should be a
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40797 can also be specified here.
40800 \begin_layout Standard
40801 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40802 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40803 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40805 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40808 \begin_layout Standard
40811 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40814 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40815 justifies the text on screen.
40816 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40820 \begin_layout Section
40824 \begin_layout Standard
40825 This dialog is described in sections
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40832 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40839 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40846 \begin_layout Section
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40851 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40852 \begin_inset space ~
40856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40858 reference "subsec:Margins"
40865 \begin_layout Section
40867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40869 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40874 \begin_inset Index idx
40877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40878 Language ! Encoding
40886 \begin_layout Standard
40887 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40888 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40889 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40891 is always encoded in utf8).
40892 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40893 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40894 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40895 -command is not known for
40896 a particular character).
40899 \begin_layout Standard
40900 If you use the option
40905 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40906 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40907 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40909 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40910 exactly one encoding.
40911 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40914 \begin_layout Standard
40916 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40917 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40918 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40919 installation supports Unicode), choose
40920 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40921 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40922 is quite incomplete, so
40923 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40928 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40929 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40930 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40931 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40932 -commands is not used, because all
40933 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40934 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40935 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40936 , two new alternative engines
40937 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40939 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40941 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40972 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40977 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40981 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40984 \begin_layout Standard
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40993 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40994 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41004 The possible settings are:
41007 \begin_layout Description
41008 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41010 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41011 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41021 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41028 \begin_layout Description
41029 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41030 format you will use.
41031 In many cases this will be
41036 \begin_inset Index idx
41039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41047 If the newer package
41052 \begin_inset Index idx
41055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 -packages ! polyglossia
41062 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41063 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41064 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41066 this package will be used instead of
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41086 would be more appropriate.
41089 \begin_layout Description
41090 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41091 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41095 (for German texts), type in
41098 \begin_inset Newline newline
41103 usepackage{ngerman}
41106 \begin_layout Description
41107 None will not use a language package.
41108 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41111 \begin_layout Standard
41112 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41132 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41138 \begin_inset Index idx
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41143 -packages ! inputenc
41149 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41150 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41151 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41155 \begin_layout Description
41156 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41158 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41159 commands, which may result in a big
41160 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41161 -commands are needed.
41164 \begin_layout Description
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41173 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41176 \begin_layout Description
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41185 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41188 \begin_layout Description
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41193 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41196 \begin_layout Description
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41205 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41206 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41222 \begin_layout Description
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41231 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41232 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41248 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41255 \begin_layout Description
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41268 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41269 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41272 \begin_layout Description
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41281 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41282 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41283 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41284 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_layout Description
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41305 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41306 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41308 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41328 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41343 \begin_layout Description
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41352 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41355 \begin_layout Description
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41360 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41363 \begin_layout Description
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41368 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41371 \begin_layout Description
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41380 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41383 \begin_layout Description
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41407 \begin_layout Description
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_layout Description
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41428 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41434 \begin_inset Index idx
41437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41444 , when using this, set the document language to
41449 \begin_layout Description
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41458 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41463 , when using this, set the document language to
41466 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_layout Description
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41481 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41487 \begin_inset Index idx
41490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41492 -packages ! japanese
41497 , when using this, set the document language to
41502 \begin_layout Description
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41511 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41516 , when using this, set the document language to
41521 \begin_layout Description
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41530 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41535 , when using this, set the document language to
41540 \begin_layout Description
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41545 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41548 \begin_layout Description
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41561 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41564 \begin_layout Description
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_inset space ~
41577 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41578 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41579 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41582 \begin_layout Description
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41588 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_layout Description
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41603 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41604 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41607 \begin_layout Description
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41616 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41622 \begin_inset Index idx
41625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41632 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41635 \begin_layout Description
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41645 \begin_inset space ~
41648 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41655 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41658 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41665 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41666 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41668 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41671 \begin_layout Description
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_inset space ~
41680 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41686 \begin_inset Index idx
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41696 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41699 \begin_layout Description
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41704 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41710 \begin_inset Index idx
41713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41715 -packages ! inputenc
41721 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41725 \begin_layout Description
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41738 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_layout Description
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41758 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41759 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41760 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41764 \begin_layout Description
41766 \begin_inset space ~
41770 \begin_inset space ~
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41777 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41778 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41781 \begin_layout Section
41783 \begin_inset Index idx
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 \begin_inset Index idx
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 \begin_inset Index idx
41806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41807 Color ! Shaded boxes
41813 \begin_inset Index idx
41816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41825 \begin_layout Standard
41826 Here you can alter the font color for the
41830 (default: black), for
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41838 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41842 (default: white) and for
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41855 sets the color back to the default.
41858 \begin_layout Standard
41859 Clicking any button showing
41867 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41868 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41869 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41870 later more quickly.
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41874 Note, if you change the
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41882 font color and use the option
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41890 in the document settings under
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41898 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41905 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41912 \begin_layout Standard
41913 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41932 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41938 Code after a forced page break:
41941 \begin_layout Itemize
41942 For the page color:
41943 \begin_inset Newline newline
41950 pagecolor{color name}
41953 \begin_layout Itemize
41954 For the text color:
41955 \begin_inset Newline newline
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41966 You are restricted to one of
42002 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_inset Newline newline
42018 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42019 names to refer to them:
42022 \begin_layout Itemize
42028 \begin_inset Newline newline
42033 page_backgroundcolor
42036 \begin_layout Itemize
42040 \begin_inset space ~
42046 \begin_inset Newline newline
42054 \begin_layout Itemize
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42064 \begin_inset Newline newline
42072 \begin_layout Itemize
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset Newline newline
42090 \begin_layout Standard
42091 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42102 \begin_inset space ~
42110 \begin_layout Section
42114 \begin_layout Standard
42115 Here you can adjust the
42119 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42123 as described in section
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42130 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42137 \begin_layout Section
42141 \begin_layout Standard
42142 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42148 \begin_inset Index idx
42151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42163 \begin_inset Index idx
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 -packages ! jurabib
42176 Sectioned bibliography
42178 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42184 \begin_inset Index idx
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 -packages ! bibtopic
42194 and you can select a
42198 for the generation of the bibliography.
42199 For a further description see section
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42206 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42213 \begin_layout Section
42217 \begin_layout Standard
42218 Here you can define the
42222 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42230 reference "sec:Index"
42237 \begin_layout Section
42241 \begin_layout Standard
42242 The PDF properties are explained in section
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42249 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42256 \begin_layout Section
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42261 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42262 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42268 \begin_inset Index idx
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42273 -packages ! amsmath
42283 \begin_inset Index idx
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42288 -packages ! amssymb
42298 \begin_inset Index idx
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 \begin_inset Index idx
42316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42328 \begin_inset Index idx
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 -packages ! mathdots
42343 \begin_inset Index idx
42346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 -packages ! mathtools
42358 \begin_inset Index idx
42361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 \begin_inset Index idx
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 -packages ! stackrel
42388 \begin_inset Index idx
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42393 -packages ! stmaryrd
42403 \begin_inset Index idx
42406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42408 -packages ! undertilde
42413 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42416 \begin_layout Description
42417 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42418 -errors in formulas,
42419 ensure that you have this enabled.
42422 \begin_layout Description
42423 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42424 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42425 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42429 \begin_layout Description
42430 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_layout Description
42446 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42461 \begin_layout Description
42462 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42473 \begin_layout Description
42474 mathtools is used for the math commands
42510 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42517 \begin_layout Description
42518 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42520 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42529 \begin_layout Description
42530 stackrel is used for the math command
42547 \begin_layout Description
42548 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42551 \begin_layout Description
42552 undertilde is used for the math command
42560 Accents for one Character
42569 \begin_layout Section
42573 \begin_layout Standard
42574 The float placement options are described in the section
42577 \begin_inset space ~
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42593 \begin_layout Section
42597 \begin_layout Standard
42598 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42600 Program Code Listings
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42613 \begin_layout Section
42617 \begin_layout Standard
42618 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42626 set to be used and set the
42631 The itemize environment is described in section
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42638 reference "sec:Itemize"
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42646 You can furthermore specify a
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42654 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42655 command of the desired character.
42656 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42663 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42669 \begin_inset space \space{}
42673 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42683 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42684 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42687 \begin_layout Standard
42688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42697 -packages in the preamble (menu
42700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42701 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42704 \begin_inset space ~
42710 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42714 usepackage{textcomp}
42717 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42721 usepackage{amssymb}
42731 \begin_layout Section
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42736 Branches are described in section
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42743 reference "sec:Branches"
42750 \begin_layout Section
42752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42754 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42761 \begin_layout Standard
42762 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42765 \begin_layout Description
42767 \begin_inset space ~
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42774 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42794 View Master Document
42795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42802 Update Master Document
42803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42810 menu or the toolbar.
42811 The default is set in
42813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42819 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42829 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42836 \begin_layout Description
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42845 Output settings for the menu
42847 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42849 \begin_inset space ~
42855 For a detailed description see section
42857 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42870 \begin_layout Description
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42876 \begin_inset space ~
42879 Options offers settings for the export format
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42892 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42905 settings are described in detail in section
42907 Math Output in XHTML
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42930 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42933 \begin_layout Description
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42940 Save transient properties
42942 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
42943 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
42944 The properties that are affected by option are currently
42948 \begin_layout Itemize
42949 the activation of change tracking
42952 \begin_layout Itemize
42953 the output of tracked changes
42956 \begin_layout Itemize
42957 the recording of the document directory path.
42960 \begin_layout Standard
42961 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
42962 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
42966 \begin_layout Section
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42975 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42977 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42979 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42981 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42986 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42987 -syntax is given in section
42988 \begin_inset space ~
42992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42994 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43001 \begin_layout Chapter
43007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43009 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43014 \begin_inset Index idx
43017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43027 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43029 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43033 It has the following submenus.
43036 \begin_layout Section
43040 \begin_layout Subsection
43044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43045 User Interface File
43046 \begin_inset Index idx
43049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43050 Customization ! of toolbars
43056 \begin_inset Index idx
43059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43060 Customization ! of menus
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43069 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43070 interface (ui) file.
43071 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43079 \begin_layout Description
43084 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43087 \begin_layout Description
43094 the menu entries in popup context menus
43097 \begin_layout Description
43102 specifies the toolbar buttons
43105 \begin_layout Standard
43106 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43107 and edit the entries.
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43111 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43123 entries must be finished with an explicit
43148 and in the case of the
43149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43161 The syntax for the entries is:
43164 \begin_layout Standard
43165 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43194 \begin_layout Standard
43196 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43199 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43200 -functions are listed in the menu
43202 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43204 \begin_inset space ~
43212 \begin_layout Standard
43213 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43220 For example, assuming you use the menu
43222 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43225 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43229 \begin_layout Standard
43230 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43256 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43271 to have the sixth bookmark.
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43283 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43284 's toolbar buttons.
43285 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43289 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43300 \begin_layout Standard
43303 Enable tool tips in main work area
43305 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43313 \begin_layout Standard
43318 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43319 should display in the menu
43321 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_layout Subsection
43335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43339 \begin_layout Standard
43342 Restore window layouts and geometries
43345 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43346 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43350 \begin_layout Standard
43353 Restore cursor positions
43355 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43359 \begin_layout Standard
43362 Load opened files from last session
43364 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43368 \begin_layout Standard
43371 Clear all session information
43373 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43374 sessions (cursor positions, names
43375 of last opened documents, etc.).
43378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43382 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43387 \begin_inset Index idx
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43399 \begin_layout Standard
43402 Backup original documents when saving
43404 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43405 it was saved the last time.
43406 It is stored in the
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43421 reference "sec:Paths"
43425 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43434 The backup file has the file extension
43435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43449 \begin_layout Standard
43452 Backup documents, every
43454 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43460 Save documents compressed by default
43462 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43463 \begin_inset space ~
43467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43469 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43474 This applies to newly created documents only.
43475 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43479 Windows & work area
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43485 Open documents in tabs
43487 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43491 \begin_layout Standard
43496 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43509 reference "sec:Paths"
43513 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43520 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43521 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43522 of \SpecialChar LyX
43524 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43525 instance is created for each file.
43528 \begin_layout Standard
43531 Single close-tab button
43533 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43543 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43544 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43547 \begin_layout Standard
43548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43557 before the change takes effect.
43565 \begin_layout Standard
43570 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43572 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43574 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43578 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43579 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43580 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43583 \begin_layout Subsection
43585 \begin_inset Index idx
43588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43597 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43605 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43618 This section only deals with the fonts
43622 the \SpecialChar LyX
43624 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43628 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43639 \begin_layout Standard
43640 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43657 (depends on the system) as its
43660 \begin_inset space ~
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43677 You can change the font size with the
43684 \begin_layout Standard
43689 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43694 points have the size of 1
43695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43710 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43715 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43722 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43732 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43734 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43735 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43736 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43737 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43738 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43740 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43747 \begin_layout Subsection
43749 \begin_inset Index idx
43752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43753 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43760 \begin_inset Index idx
43763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43772 \begin_layout Standard
43773 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43774 by choosing an item in the
43775 list and selecting the
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43783 By checking the option
43787 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43790 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43800 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43803 \begin_layout Subsection
43805 \begin_inset Index idx
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 \begin_layout Standard
43818 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43827 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43828 This feature is described in section
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43835 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 Checking the option
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43859 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43862 \begin_layout Section
43864 \begin_inset Index idx
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43876 \begin_layout Subsection
43880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43887 Cursor follows scrollbar
43889 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43895 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43896 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43899 \begin_layout Standard
43902 Scroll below end of document
43904 is self-explanatory.
43907 \begin_layout Standard
43908 In \SpecialChar LyX
43909 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43916 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43918 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43919 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43922 \begin_layout Standard
43925 Sort environments alphabetically
43927 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43933 Group environments by their category
43935 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43938 \begin_layout Standard
43943 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43958 \begin_layout Standard
43959 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43964 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43965 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43969 \begin_layout Subsection
43971 \begin_inset Index idx
43974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43981 \begin_inset Index idx
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 Settings ! Shortcuts
43993 \begin_layout Standard
43998 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44000 Several binding files are available, among them:
44003 \begin_layout Description
44004 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44007 \begin_layout Description
44008 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44020 \begin_layout Description
44021 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44038 , and binding files for special languages.
44039 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44044 \begin_inset space \space{}
44048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44056 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44057 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44058 will try to use the appropriate binding
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44063 Some binding files, like
44067 , only have a limited scope.
44068 When looking at the end of the file
44072 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44075 \begin_layout Standard
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44088 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44089 in the selected key binding file.
44092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44096 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44101 \begin_inset Index idx
44104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44105 Key Bindings ! Editing
44113 \begin_layout Standard
44114 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44115 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44116 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44117 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44120 Show key-bindings containing
44123 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44124 Insert there for example as keyword
44125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44132 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44133 functions that contain
44134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44142 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44143 All \SpecialChar LyX
44144 functions are also listed in the file
44149 that you will find in the
44156 \begin_layout Standard
44157 For example, to add the shortcut
44165 , select the function and press the
44170 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44171 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44174 \begin_layout Standard
44175 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44176 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44178 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44179 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44181 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44186 \begin_layout Standard
44187 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44190 \begin_layout Standard
44191 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44193 The syntax of the entries is:
44196 \begin_layout Standard
44202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44221 \begin_layout Subsection
44223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44225 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44230 \begin_inset Index idx
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44240 \begin_inset Index idx
44243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44252 \begin_layout Standard
44253 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44254 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44255 provides keyboard maps.
44256 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44257 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44269 and select the keyboard map file named
44276 \begin_layout Standard
44285 keyboard map and, if you use the
44289 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44292 arg "keymap-primary"
44298 arg "keymap-secondary"
44301 respectively or toggle between them with
44304 arg "keymap-toggle"
44310 \begin_layout Standard
44311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44319 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44328 \begin_layout Standard
44329 You can also specify the mouse
44331 Wheel scrolling speed
44334 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44338 Middle mouse button pasting
44340 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44341 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44344 \begin_layout Standard
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44361 you can select a key for zooming.
44362 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44365 \begin_layout Subsection
44369 \begin_layout Standard
44370 Input completion is described in section
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44377 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44384 \begin_layout Section
44386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44393 \begin_inset Index idx
44396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 \begin_inset Index idx
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44415 \begin_layout Standard
44416 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44417 are normally determined during
44419 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44422 \begin_layout Description
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44427 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44428 's working directory.
44429 It is the default when you
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44448 \begin_layout Description
44450 \begin_inset space ~
44453 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44461 \begin_inset space ~
44469 \begin_layout Description
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44474 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44484 \begin_inset Newline newline
44488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44500 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44501 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44509 \begin_layout Description
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset Index idx
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44524 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44525 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44532 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44540 will be used to save the backups.
44541 \begin_inset Newline newline
44544 Backup files have the ending
44545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44555 \begin_layout Description
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44560 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44561 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44563 \begin_inset Newline newline
44570 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44576 You can edit this file with the program
44585 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44586 in its preferences under
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44595 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44600 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44602 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44603 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44609 and \SpecialChar LyX
44610 need to be running the same time.
44611 \begin_inset Newline newline
44614 The pipe is also used for the
44618 feature, see section
44619 \begin_inset space ~
44623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44625 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44630 \begin_inset Newline newline
44633 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44634 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44635 \begin_inset Newline newline
44651 \begin_layout Description
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44656 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44659 \begin_layout Description
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44664 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44665 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44666 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44669 \begin_layout Description
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44674 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44680 You only need to specify it if you are using
44684 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44686 For \SpecialChar LyX
44691 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44695 \begin_layout Description
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44700 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44701 When \SpecialChar LyX
44702 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44703 to find it on the system.
44704 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44706 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44715 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44716 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44719 \begin_layout Description
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44724 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44725 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44726 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44727 code or in the document
44729 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44731 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44732 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44733 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44734 scanned for the input files.
44735 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44736 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44738 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44739 compilation may fail for some documents.
44742 \begin_layout Section
44746 \begin_layout Standard
44747 Here you can insert your
44756 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44764 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44768 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44771 \begin_layout Section
44773 \begin_inset Index idx
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44777 Language ! Settings
44783 \begin_inset Index idx
44786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44787 Settings ! Language
44795 \begin_layout Subsection
44797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44799 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44806 \begin_layout Description
44808 \begin_inset space ~
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44815 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44817 You can find its actual translation status here:
44818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44820 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44827 \begin_layout Description
44829 \begin_inset space ~
44832 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44833 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44834 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44835 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44852 The most widespread language package is
44857 \begin_inset Index idx
44860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44867 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44869 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44870 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44871 come with the alternative
44877 \begin_inset Index idx
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44882 -packages ! polyglossia
44887 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44888 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44894 The available selections are described in section
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44901 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44908 \begin_layout Description
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44913 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44914 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44915 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44916 An example is the start command
44922 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44924 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44943 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44948 \begin_layout Description
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44958 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44959 command toggles the package on and off.
44962 \begin_layout Description
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset space ~
44971 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44975 \begin_layout Description
44977 \begin_inset space ~
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44984 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44988 \begin_layout Description
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44994 \begin_inset space ~
44997 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44998 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44999 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45001 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45008 \begin_layout Description
45010 \begin_inset space ~
45013 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45015 When this option is not set, the
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45023 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45025 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45036 \begin_layout Description
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45050 When it is not set, the
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45058 is set to the end of the document.
45061 \begin_layout Description
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45070 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45071 language will be underlined in blue.
45074 \begin_layout Description
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45080 \begin_inset space ~
45083 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45084 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45087 \begin_layout Description
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45092 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45093 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45094 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45095 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45098 \begin_layout Subsection
45102 \begin_layout Standard
45103 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45104 \begin_inset space ~
45108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45110 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45117 \begin_layout Section
45121 \begin_layout Subsection
45123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45125 name "subsec:General-output"
45132 \begin_layout Description
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45137 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45139 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45147 For a detailed description see section
45149 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45167 Options Options for the program
45171 that is used for the export format
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45182 reference "subsec:Export"
45187 Possible options are listed in the
45192 \begin_inset Newline newline
45196 \begin_inset Flex URL
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45211 \begin_layout Description
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45220 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45223 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45224 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45226 \begin_inset space ~
45232 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45235 \begin_layout Description
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45241 \begin_inset Index idx
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45251 \begin_inset Index idx
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45255 Settings ! Date format
45260 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45261 \begin_inset Newline newline
45265 \begin_inset Flex URL
45268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45276 \begin_inset Newline newline
45279 For example the format
45280 \begin_inset Newline newline
45284 \begin_inset Newline newline
45287 prints the date as day/month/year.
45290 \begin_layout Description
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45299 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45300 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45303 \begin_layout Subsection
45309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45311 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45316 \begin_inset Index idx
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45346 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45351 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45372 are used for Cyrillic.
45373 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45386 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45388 sets up in the background.
45389 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45392 \begin_layout Description
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45406 \begin_inset space ~
45409 options They only have an effect when the program
45413 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45416 \begin_layout Standard
45417 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45418 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45419 manuals of the applications.
45422 \begin_layout Description
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45427 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45428 \begin_inset space ~
45432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45434 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45441 \begin_layout Description
45443 \begin_inset space ~
45446 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45447 \begin_inset space ~
45451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45453 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45460 \begin_layout Description
45462 \begin_inset space ~
45465 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45472 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45479 \begin_layout Description
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45488 command Command for the program
45490 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45493 that is described in the section
45495 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45500 Additional Features
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 There are additionally the following options:
45509 \begin_layout Description
45511 \begin_inset space ~
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45519 \begin_inset space ~
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_inset space ~
45531 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45549 to separate folders.
45550 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45552 \begin_inset Index idx
45555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 \begin_inset Index idx
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 \begin_layout Description
45576 \begin_inset space ~
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45588 \begin_inset space ~
45592 \begin_inset space ~
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45599 changes Removes all manually set
45605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45606 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45608 \begin_inset space ~
45613 dialog when changing the document class.
45616 \begin_layout Section
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset Index idx
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45634 \begin_layout Subsection
45636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45638 name "subsec:Converters"
45643 \begin_inset Index idx
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 \begin_layout Standard
45656 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45657 from one format to another.
45658 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45659 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45671 field and press the
45676 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45685 drop-down list, modify the
45689 field and press the
45696 \begin_layout Standard
45699 Converter File Cache
45705 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45707 Maximum Age (in days
45710 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45711 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45714 \begin_layout Standard
45715 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45716 definition, is described in the section
45727 \begin_layout Subsection
45729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45731 name "sec:File-Formats"
45736 \begin_inset Index idx
45739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 \begin_inset Index idx
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45758 \begin_layout Standard
45759 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45769 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45772 \begin_layout Standard
45773 You can also define the
45775 Default output format
45777 that is used when you use
45779 View, Update, View Master Document
45783 Update Master Document
45789 menu or the toolbar.
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45804 \begin_layout Standard
45805 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45807 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45808 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45809 This is done by specifying a
45814 More about this is described in the section
45825 \begin_layout Chapter
45826 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45828 \begin_inset Index idx
45831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45840 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45849 \begin_inset space ~
45853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45855 reference "tab:Units"
45859 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45860 and used in this documentation.
45863 \begin_layout Standard
45864 \begin_inset Float table
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45871 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 \begin_inset Tabular
45898 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45899 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45900 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45902 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46108 scaled point (65536
46109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46187 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46260 % of original image width
46265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46576 \begin_layout Chapter
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46580 name "chap:Credits"
46587 \begin_layout Standard
46588 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46589 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46592 \begin_layout Itemize
46595 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46598 \begin_layout Itemize
46604 \begin_layout Itemize
46610 \begin_layout Itemize
46616 \begin_layout Itemize
46622 \begin_layout Itemize
46628 \begin_layout Itemize
46634 \begin_layout Itemize
46640 \begin_layout Itemize
46643 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46646 \begin_layout Itemize
46652 \begin_layout Itemize
46658 \begin_layout Itemize
46664 \begin_layout Itemize
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46676 \begin_layout Itemize
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46688 \begin_layout Itemize
46694 \begin_layout Itemize
46695 The \SpecialChar LyX
46697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46706 \begin_layout Standard
46707 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46710 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46717 \begin_layout Bibliography
46718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46719 LatexCommand bibitem
46725 The \SpecialChar LyX
46727 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46730 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46735 \begin_inset Newline newline
46739 \begin_inset Flex URL
46742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46752 \begin_layout Bibliography
46753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46754 LatexCommand bibitem
46755 key "latexcompanion"
46759 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46761 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46762 Companion Second Edition.
46765 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46768 \begin_layout Bibliography
46769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46770 LatexCommand bibitem
46775 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46778 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46782 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46785 \begin_layout Bibliography
46786 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46787 LatexCommand bibitem
46795 : A Document Preparation System.
46798 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46801 \begin_layout Bibliography
46802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46803 LatexCommand bibitem
46812 The \SpecialChar TeX
46816 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46819 \begin_layout Bibliography
46820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46821 LatexCommand bibitem
46826 The \SpecialChar TeX
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_inset Flex URL
46835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46845 \begin_layout Bibliography
46846 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46847 LatexCommand bibitem
46852 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46854 \begin_inset Newline newline
46858 \begin_inset Flex URL
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46863 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46871 \begin_layout Bibliography
46872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46873 LatexCommand bibitem
46879 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46881 name "Documentation"
46882 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46888 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46892 \begin_inset Newline newline
46896 \begin_inset Flex URL
46899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46901 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46909 \begin_layout Bibliography
46910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46911 LatexCommand bibitem
46917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46919 name "Documentation"
46920 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46924 how to use the program
46926 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46930 \begin_inset Newline newline
46934 \begin_inset Flex URL
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46939 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46947 \begin_layout Bibliography
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46949 LatexCommand bibitem
46955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46957 name "Documentation"
46958 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46967 \begin_inset Newline newline
46971 \begin_inset Flex URL
46974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46976 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46984 \begin_layout Bibliography
46985 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46986 LatexCommand bibitem
46987 key "makeindex-man"
46992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46995 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47004 \begin_inset Newline newline
47008 \begin_inset Flex URL
47011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47013 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47021 \begin_layout Bibliography
47022 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47023 LatexCommand bibitem
47029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47031 name "Documentation"
47032 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47041 \begin_inset Newline newline
47045 \begin_inset Flex URL
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47058 \begin_layout Bibliography
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47060 LatexCommand bibitem
47066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47068 name "Documentation"
47069 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47073 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47075 \begin_inset Newline newline
47079 \begin_inset Flex URL
47082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47084 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47092 \begin_layout Bibliography
47093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47094 LatexCommand bibitem
47100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47102 name "Documentation"
47103 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47107 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47113 \begin_inset Index idx
47116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47118 -packages ! caption
47124 \begin_inset Newline newline
47128 \begin_inset Flex URL
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47141 \begin_layout Bibliography
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47143 LatexCommand bibitem
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47151 name "Documentation"
47152 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47156 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47162 \begin_inset Index idx
47165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 -packages ! enumitem
47173 \begin_inset Newline newline
47177 \begin_inset Flex URL
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47182 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47190 \begin_layout Bibliography
47191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47192 LatexCommand bibitem
47198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47200 name "Documentation"
47201 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47205 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47211 \begin_inset Index idx
47214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47216 -packages ! fancyhdr
47222 \begin_inset Newline newline
47226 \begin_inset Flex URL
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47231 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47239 \begin_layout Bibliography
47240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47241 LatexCommand bibitem
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47249 name "Documentation"
47250 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47254 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47260 \begin_inset Index idx
47263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47265 -packages ! hyperref
47271 \begin_inset Newline newline
47275 \begin_inset Flex URL
47278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47288 \begin_layout Bibliography
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47290 LatexCommand bibitem
47296 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47298 name "Documentation"
47299 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47303 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47309 \begin_inset Index idx
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47314 -packages ! nomencl
47320 \begin_inset Newline newline
47324 \begin_inset Flex URL
47327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47329 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47337 \begin_layout Bibliography
47338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47339 LatexCommand bibitem
47345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47347 name "Documentation"
47348 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47352 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47358 \begin_inset Index idx
47361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 -packages ! prettyref
47369 \begin_inset Newline newline
47373 \begin_inset Flex URL
47376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47378 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47386 \begin_layout Bibliography
47387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47388 LatexCommand bibitem
47394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47396 name "Documentation"
47397 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47401 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47407 \begin_inset Index idx
47410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47412 -packages ! refstyle
47418 \begin_inset Newline newline
47422 \begin_inset Flex URL
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47435 \begin_layout Bibliography
47436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47437 LatexCommand bibitem
47443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47446 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47450 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47452 \begin_inset Newline newline
47456 \begin_inset Flex URL
47459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47461 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47469 \begin_layout Bibliography
47470 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47471 LatexCommand bibitem
47477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47480 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47484 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47486 \begin_inset Newline newline
47490 \begin_inset Flex URL
47493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47495 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47503 \begin_layout Bibliography
47504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47505 LatexCommand bibitem
47511 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47514 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47518 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47519 for Cyrillic languages:
47520 \begin_inset Newline newline
47524 \begin_inset Flex URL
47527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47529 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47537 \begin_layout Bibliography
47538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47539 LatexCommand bibitem
47545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47548 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47552 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47554 \begin_inset Newline newline
47558 \begin_inset Flex URL
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47563 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47571 \begin_layout Bibliography
47572 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47573 LatexCommand bibitem
47579 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47582 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47586 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47588 \begin_inset Newline newline
47592 \begin_inset Flex URL
47595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47597 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47605 \begin_layout Bibliography
47606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47607 LatexCommand bibitem
47613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47616 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47620 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47622 \begin_inset Newline newline
47626 \begin_inset Flex URL
47629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47631 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47639 \begin_layout Bibliography
47640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47641 LatexCommand bibitem
47647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47650 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47654 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47656 \begin_inset Newline newline
47660 \begin_inset Flex URL
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47665 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47673 \begin_layout Bibliography
47674 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47675 LatexCommand bibitem
47681 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47684 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47688 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47690 \begin_inset Newline newline
47694 \begin_inset Flex URL
47697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47699 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47707 \begin_layout Bibliography
47708 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47709 LatexCommand bibitem
47715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47718 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47722 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47724 \begin_inset Newline newline
47728 \begin_inset Flex URL
47731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47733 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47741 \begin_layout Bibliography
47742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47743 LatexCommand bibitem
47749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47752 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47756 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47758 \begin_inset Newline newline
47762 \begin_inset Flex URL
47765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47767 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47775 \begin_layout Bibliography
47776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47777 LatexCommand bibitem
47783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47786 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47790 about new features in
47796 \begin_inset Newline newline
47800 \begin_inset Flex URL
47803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47813 \begin_layout Standard
47814 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47848 \begin_inset Note Note
47851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47858 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47859 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47860 bibliography is the second one:
47868 \begin_layout Standard
47869 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47870 LatexCommand bibtex
47871 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47872 options "biblio/alphadin"
47879 \begin_layout Standard
47880 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47885 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47886 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47892 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47893 LatexCommand printindex